Catalogue 2023

INDUSTRIAL FURNITURE
AND WORKSTATIONS

ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 3d.treston.com

3D ONLINE
CONFIGURATOR
Design your own workstation solution
easily in 3D
3d.treston.com
2 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 Workspaces for happier workfaces

About us 4 6. Drawer units 126

Industrial ergonomics 6 Light steel cabinet LMC 128
ESD protection 12 Drawer units 30 and 35 129
LEAN thinking 14 Drawer unit 45 130
Environmental actions 16 Drawer unit 55 134
Decorating with colour 18 Drawer unit 71 138
Drawer units 70, 90 and 130 139

1. Workbenches 19
Concept - the most versatile workbench 22
7. Storage systems 150
WB - aesthetic and easily adaptable 28
FiFo Flow Rack 151
TED - electric desk for industrial use 32
Shelving system 156
Quick Edge - extremely fast height adjustment 36
Heavy shelving system 159
TP - ideal basic workbench 38
Shelving cabinets 162
TPH - standard workbench with one shelf 44
Industrial cabinets 164
TPB - efficient packing bench 48
Perforated panels 169
Workshop - sturdy, heavy-duty workbench 50
Tool storage systems 172
Panel hooks 176

2. Workbench accessories 54 Small-parts storage cabinets 183

Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP, Workshop 55 Spacemisers for small-parts storage cabinets 185

WB 72 Storage bin cabinets 186

TPH and TPB 77 Spacemisers for storage bin cabinets 187

Accessories that suit all benches 82 High density storage cabinets 188

Packing material roll stands and cutters 86 Shelf bins 189

Stacking bins 194
Storage and picking bins 197
Small drawers 198

3. Lighting 88 Stacking bin racks 199

4. Chairs 95 8. Spare parts 200

5. Trolleys 102
Ergonomics for manual handling of loads 104
Universal trolley WTR 110
Treston Industrial Multi trolley 111
Adjustable trolley TRTA 114
Reel holder trolley RRT 115
Mobile workstations 116
Trolleys for additional workspace 117
Packing trolleys 118
Heavy-duty trolley 120
Fitter’s trolley 121
Service trolley 122
Bin and cabinet trolley 124
 WORKSPACES FOR HAPPIER WORKFACES

WORKSPACES
FOR HAPPIER
WORKFACES
There’s no way around it. Sustainable long term business success in every industry is founded
on empowered, motivated and healthy employees, and hyper adaptability to constant
change.

The solution is simple.

A smart industrial workspace that adapts flexibly to the needs of the individual and the
constant changes in the process. A next generation workstation and material flow solution that
drives better business performance , environmental performance and personal performance
by integrating and optimizing all work phases into a leaner, cleaner and greener process.

With decades of experience, in depth understanding of ergonomics in industrial environments,

unmatched ESD competence and proven LEAN knowhow we at Treston are in a unique
position to help our customers in keeping their business and people in good shape.

Workspaces for happier workfaces.

This is our aspiration. This is our promise. This is what Treston is all about.

4 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 600,000+ workstations
delivered

50+ years of ergonomic

workspace development and
manufacturing

30+ countries,
global footprint

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 5

 Workspaces for happier workfaces

Industrial ergonomics

Have you paid attention to the methods of transferring and the employee. Developing the working environment
objects, the placement and accessibility of tools, the and working methods pays off, as it helps the company
opportunities to perform one’s work either sitting down reduce the amount of sick leave and the number of
or standing up, and lighting at your workplace? All of accidents at work, improve the quality of work, and increase
the above are part of ergonomic workstation design, efficiency and production volumes. Employees who work in
and companies that have paid attention to these have a pleasant environment are more energetic and productive.
been able to significantly improve their productivity.

However, good ergonomics means more than the ability

to adjust a workstation’s furniture. Improving ergonomics
requires knowing the work process from start to finish, but
most importantly, identifying the individual needs of the job

DEFINITION OF ERGONOMICS
"The word ergonomics — “the science of work” is derived from the Greek ergon (work) and nomos
(laws). Ergonomics (or human factors) is the scientific discipline concerned with the understanding of
interactions among humans and other elements of a system, and the profession that applies theory,
principles, data, and methods to design in order to optimize human well-being and overall system
performance."

6 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

Why should you invest in ergonomics?
Musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs) affect most employees. According to European Agency for Safety and Health at
Work musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs) are the single largest occupational health hazard in Europe: up to three out of five
employees report musculoskeletal symptoms. In addition, Confederation of Finnish Industries has reported that employees in
the industrial sector have the most absences due to sickness, on average 16 working days per person/year.

Proper ergonomics can reduce MSD-related absences and improve productivity resulting in significant annual savings.
A study estimating the effectiveness of ergonomics interventions revealed that musculoskeletal symptoms and disorders were
reduced 57% and absences due to MSDs reduced 72% as a result of measures that improve ergonomics. The above
mentioned study on the effectiveness of ergonomics interventions concluded that productivity improved 46% through measures
that improved ergonomics.

Indeed there are several aspects that proper ergonomics can have a positive impact on in the long run. The benefits of proper
ergonomics are both for the employer and for the employee.

Benefits of ergonomics to the Benefits of ergonomics to the

EMPLOYER EMPLOYEE

• Improves occupational safety and reduces • Improves employees' health and well-being
sickness absences
• Healthy and safe working environments
• Improves employees’ performance promote the ability to work and also have
a positive effect on the ability to function
• Reduces occupational health care costs
during leisure time
• Increases productivity and efficiency
• More satisfaction for your work
• Motivates and engages employees

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 7

 How to improve the ergonomics of your
workspace?

Below you will find a list of the five key factors that you can use to improve the ergonomics of your industrial
workstations.

1. Have everything you need close by

When sizing your workstations, make sure that the necessary equipment and furniture are right where they need to be. This
includes ensuring that there is sufficient space for various work tasks and that you can easily switch between each task. Remember
to pay attention to the purpose of each workspace, as a functional and efficient space is also a safe one.

When planning the layout of your furniture and equipment, ensure that all the devices and materials you need are readily
available and easy to reach. Any infrequently used materials can be stored on a shelf or auxiliary top or in a drawer, for
example. A carefully planned workspace is also a productive one.

2. Have enough adjustable lighting at your disposal

Your eyes are just as sensitive to your working conditions as the rest of your body. That’s why you need to be able to adjust your
lighting to each task at hand. Make sure that sufficient lighting is available for each work phase and task. Any tasks that demand
a great deal of accuracy for longer periods of time, such as quality control or assembly work, usually require lots of light as well.

When your light source is both sufficiently powerful and correctly directed, it can provide the lighting and contrast you need –
regardless of personal preference or the accuracy demanded by each task.

3. Handle your loads carefully

You may think that lifting a 20–25 kg package does not sound like much of a challenge, but manually handling even these types
of smaller loads can result in back problems and many other adverse effects to your health. In general, the manual handling of
loads represents a major occupational risk that can lead to injuries to the lower back and shoulders. To ensure the health, safety
and efficiency of you and your employees, pay particular attention to how loads are handled at your place of work.

To guarantee the efficiency and ergonomics of your workplace, choose the right trolley or mobile auxiliary top for transporting
any larger loads, and instruct your employees on the correct techniques for handling loads.

4. Adjust your working posture regularly

Make sure that you vary your working posture throughout the day. It’s never a good idea to remain in the same position all
the time, no matter if you’re seated or standing - so remember to change your working posture frequently. The latest cognitive
research has demonstrated the benefits of regularly varying your working posture. According to the research results, even small
movements, such as standing up occasionally, can help improve your memory, attentiveness, learning and overall cognitive
performance.

5. Remember to adjust your chair

A chair that is designed for ergonomic working postures forms a vital part of any well-functioning, ergonomic and user-friendly
workstation. Proper sitting techniques will allow you to work efficiently, reduce the risk that you will neglect to vary your posture,
and permit you to operate in a way that is best for you and your work. However, an ergonomic chair is not truly ergonomic until it
has been adjusted to the needs of the person using it – so remember to adjust the chair and not the employee!

Watch this animation: 6 ways to improve your workspace ergonomics

8 https://vimeo.com/358783022
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 Free e-book: "Increasing productivity with proper ergonomics"

This informational e-book will help you learn how ergonomic environments
can have a direct influence on employee well-being, the reduction of time
and waste, and ultimately, greater productivity.

treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 9

 Seated or standing work?
The choice of a seated or standing working position is
ACCURATE LIGHT HEAVY dependent upon the task to be executed. The height of
the work surface is determined by such factors as size and
weight of the part, precision requirement, assembly process,
repetitiveness etc.

Height adjustability is especially useful when the size of the

products being handled varies or when several people use
women 95 -105 cm

the same workstation.

men 100-110 cm

women 85 - 90 cm
men 90 - 95 cm

women 70 - 85 cm
men 75 - 90 cm

Standing work
Semi-sitting
between sitting and
standing; reduces the
Task Primary choice Secondary choice strain of the back due to
sitting and the strain of
Lifting the weight over 5 kgs Standing Semi-sitting the lower limbs due to
standing.
Working below the elbow level Standing Semi-sitting

Need to reach widely in horizontal level Standing Semi-sitting

Light assembly work Sitting Semi-sitting

Precision work Sitting Semi-sitting

Visual monitoring or supervising Sitting Semi-sitting

Need to move between workstations Semi-sitting Standing

10 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

Reaching distances and heights

To improve working postures in assembly work, the most-

often used parts should be placed into the optimal horizontal
working area within the operator’s sight. Avoid overly large
or deep workbenches, which can cause improper reach
and reduced productivity. Assembly work is most ergonomic
when parts are within easy view and reach.

The vertical work area and reach zone can be fine-tuned

with accessories. Our height adjustable arms optimize work
movements and keep parts or tools within easy access.
Operators can work with wrists and arms in optimal posture
with shoulders relaxed. Tilted bin rails and shelves keep the
wrist in a neutral position when picking parts. The tilt angle
also provides easy identification of the parts with the proper
viewing angle.

ZONE 1: Primary work zone (repetitive access)

ZONE 2: Secondary work zone (occasional access)

ZONE 3: Tertiary work zone (seldom access)

Ergonomic workzones

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 11

 Work smarter, not harder

ESD protection guarantees a safe

working environment

Particularly in the electronics industry, work is often carried out in an ESD protected area (EPA) that is protected from
static discharge. To create and maintain an EPA one needs to pay special attention to furniture and personnel, which need to
be grounded. Protection can involve earthing equipment and painting the frame of the workstation with semi-conductive paint.

We have extensive experience in developing, manufacturing and supplying ESD furnishings. All our workstations and related
products are available with an electrically semi-conductive coat of paint and we supply furnishings, seats and earthing
components for ESD-protected workstations. We also build complete production systems equipped with ESD-protection. Our
ESD-protected products meet the requirements specified in the IEC 61340-5-1 standard.

STATIC ELECTRICITY

The abbreviation ESD stands for Electrostatic Discharge, a process that occurs between two objects of differing
electric potential. Normally, electric charges are discharged slowly from objects’ surfaces. If the difference in
electric potential becomes too great, the electrical current accelerates resulting in a sudden current surge.

An ESD protected area is called an EPA. In an EPA, ESD protection must be observed in all materials,
employees’ clothing and air humidity. Employees in an EPA must also be earthed with protective resistance
(1 Mohm) to an ESD earth.

Watch this video: ESD workstation management

12 https://vimeo.com/657013937
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
Investing in an EPA is important
There are two types of ESD damage in industrial and bear eyes and the product may pass all tests and function
technical environments. Firstly, a fatal defect that is usually normally for some time. However, latent damage affects the
easily detected during assembly or handling, or at least performance and durability of the product and and often
through careful testing. Such products are usually not results in poor product quality.
delivered to customers. Secondly, another type of ESD
damage is latent damage. This is difficult to detect with

Static charge management of working area:

• ESD-protected workstations. Attention paid to ESD safe storing, moving

and packing.
• Personnel protected with shoes, wrist straps and other needed
accessories
• Staff training, work instructions and quality control
• Cleanliness of ESD-protected equipment. Dust and
dirt insulate. READ MORE ABOUT
• Commitment to continuous improvement in static Treston ESD products from
our separate brochure.
electricity management

treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

Example of an ESD-protected area (EPA)

9
6
1

4
3

7 2

1. Common point ground 4. Wrist strap + earth bounding point 7. Trolley with ESD castors
2. ESD floor 5. Chair with ESD castors 8. ESD garments (e.g. jacket and shoes)
3. Semi-conductive table 6. Semi-conductive ESD shelf 9. EPA sign

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 13

 Work smarter, not harder

LEAN thinking perfects production processes

Developed in the Japanese automotive industry, Lean is including the overall order-supply chain. The Lean system
an operating philosophy that helps to make production is everything that adds value for the customer and helps put
smooth and efficient. Lean-based production processes things in the right order. The goal is to eliminate anything
and workstations are functional and task-oriented. Every that does not add value. When organising workstations
item in the workstation has its own designated place, and according to the Lean system, the first job is to identify
there are no unnecessary items.
• what is the product that is being made,
When developing operations, instead of focusing on a
• what are the customer needs, and
single task or workstation, it is better to consider the big
picture and identify areas where work, time or materials • what is the pace at which the product needs to be
are wasted. In practice, Lean involves the entire process, manufactured.

Free e-book: "LEAN thinking perfects production processes"

This e-book will help you understand LEAN philosophy and how Treston, as a
manufacturer of technical facilities and ergonomic furniture, can help you with the
LEAN thinking to perfect your production processes.

treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

14 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

Treston’s ergonomic solutions for Lean
and 5S environments
Full-time employees spend around 40 hours a week at
their workstations, adding up to around 1700 hours
a year. Employees typically spend more of their waking
hours at their workstations than at any other single place. Treston products are ideally suited for use in Lean
Workstations are therefore important places. They should and 5S production processes:
be designed not only extremely functional from a point of
view of increasing efficiency but also to be ergonomic, 1 Adjustable workbenches and task chairs
1.
pleasant and comfortable to work. Designing workstations
according to the principles of ergonomics and LEAN bring 2.
2 Modular storage solutions
the best benefits to employees, employers and customers.
3.
3 Ergonomic trolleys
Ergonomic Treston products are ideally suited for use in Lean
and 5S production processes. The open design of Treston 4 Adjustable task lighting
4.
workstations enables fast visual inspections while providing
easy access to tools and components. Accessories
can also be easily added, removed and interchanged,
enhancing responsiveness and supporting continuity in
operations. Tool holders, document shelves and bins help
to keep the workstation tidy and well organized. From an
ergonomics point of view, they can be positioned in just the
right place for the employee to make performing the work
as ergonomic and pleasant as possible.

Ergonomic, Lean-compatible workstations give employees

an opportunity each day to perform to the best of their
abilities.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 15

 Think further, act greener

On a journey towards a carbon neutral tomorrow

Environmental actions
Treston is the first sustainable wood-based bioplastic stor- as well as to increase the consideration of environmental
age option provider for industry. In the future we aim to offer aspects in all decision-making and actions. The energy and
bioplastic-based alternatives for all our plastic products and water consumption of our factories is constantly monitored,
parts. In addition, our long-term target is to provide 100 and adverse effects on the environment reduced through
% carbon neutral workstation solutions. We want to play operational optimisation. The heat generated by our
our part in a cleaner environment and making sustainable machinery is used for heating factory premises. Also, our
choices. We manufacture in a sustainable way high-quality water consumption has decreased considerably over the
products that last from one generation to another. last few years. The plastic and steel waste generated by us
is recycled 100 per cent, and we favour environmentally
friendly alternatives when purchasing machinery.
We follow the principle of continuous Additionally, the metal, plastic, and aluminium parts of our
products can be recycled at the end of their useful life.
development
We aim to minimise the environmental strain of our
operations as part of a continuous improvement model. We
seek to promote environmental thinking within the Group,

"Our long term target is to provide

100% carbon neutral workstations"

16 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

Our standards comply with
the highest certification requirements

CERTIFICATE GS/22/HEL/01702
ZERTIFIKAT replacing/ersetzt: GS/20/HEL/00587

Order no. / Auftragsnr.: GZ-CERT221003034-01 Issue date / ausgestellt: 2022-11-22

Test report ref. / Prüfbericht-Nr.: GZES221001911601 Invalid from / ungültig ab: 2027-11-22

License Holder / Genehmigungsinhaber:

Stera Technologies Oy
Tierankatu 5 A, FI-20520, Turku, Finland
Manufacturing Plant(s) / Fertigungsstätte(n):
Stera Technologies Oy
Tierankatu 5 A, FI-20520, Turku, Finland
Certified Product / Zertifiziertes Produkt:
Product / Produkt: Wall- and Ceiling Lamp / Wand- und Deckenleuchte
Type/Model No. / Typ/Modell-Nr.: TNL1200P, TNL1200, TNL900, TNL500W
Trademarks / Markenzeichen:

Characteristics / Technische Daten: 220 V-240V; 50 Hz / 60 Hz; Class I / Schutzklasse I; IP20; ta 50 °C;
TNL1200P, TNL1200: 56 W
TNL900: 42 W
TNL500W: 14 W
Tested according to / Geprüft nach: EN IEC 60598-2-1:2021
EN IEC 60598-1:2021
AfPS GS 2019:01 PAK
The product fulfils the requirements of the German Product Safety Act to ensure safety and health (§ 21 (1) ProdSG). The license holder is authorized to mark the
described product with the GS mark as shown above. Marking requirements of § 6 (1) ProdSG have to be observed when making the certified products available on the
market.
Das Produkt entspricht den Anforderungen des Produktsicherheitsgesetzes hinsichtlich der Gewährleistung von Sicherheit und Gesundheit (§ 21 (1) ProdSG). Der
Genehmigungsinhaber ist berechtigt, das beschriebene Produkt mit dem GS-Zeichen in der oben abgebildeten Form zu kennzeichnen. Bei Bereitstellung auf dem Markt
sind die Kennzeichnungspflichten gemäss § 6 (1) ProdSG einzuhalten.

Remarks / Bemerkungen:
RG1; Non-user replaceable LEDs / nicht- Benutzer auswechselbare LED

SGS Fimko Ltd

Signature

Peter Fagerstedt
Certification Manager

The test mark regulation is an integral part of this certificate. Die Zertifizierbestimmungen sind integraler Bestandteil des Zertifikates.

Page 1 of 1

This document is issued by the Company under its General Conditions

of Service accessible at http://www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm.
Attention is drawn to the limitation of liability, indemnification and
jurisdiction issues defined therein.
Certification Body for products / Zertifizierstelle für Produkte
Any holder of this document is advised that information contained
hereon reflects the Company’s findings at the time of its intervention
only and within the limits of Client’s instructions, if any. The Company’s
sole responsibility is to its Client and this document does not exonerate
parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations
under the transaction documents. Any unauthorized alteration, forgery or
falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful
and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law.

Quality certification Environmental Management Packaging treatment ESD-approval certification GS certification

System certification following to EU directives. for lighting
Our ESD products fulfill the
ISO 9001 : 2015 ISO 14001 : 2015 basic requirements of IEC
61340-5-1.

Certificate of Qualification Q514/2017 V1.1 1/1 Certificate of Qualification Q515-1/2017 V1.1 1/1 Certificate of Qualification Q518/2017 V1.0 1/1

15.3.2017 15.3.2017 18.3.2017

Certificate of Qualification
Certificate of Qualification Certificate of Qualification
ESD control items – Workstations
Cleanroom Suitability of Cleanroom Suitability of Chair Treston Concept and WB
Treston Concept and WB Workstations
Treston Ergo C20PU-ESD ESD-control characteristics of Treston Concept and WB workstations were assessed in
accordance with IEC 61340-5-1 and IEC 61340-2-3. Summary of the qualification is shown in
The cleanroom suitability of Treston Concept and WB workstations was assessed in the Table 1. Detailed information is presented in a technical report C518/2017.
cleanroom of ISO 14644-1 class 7, February 2017. The requirements of ISO class 7 were met at The cleanroom suitability of Treston Ergo C20PU-ESD chair was assessed in the cleanroom of
rest and in operation. Summary of the qualification is shown in Table 1. Detailed information is ISO 14644-1 class 7, February 2017. The requirements of ISO class 7 were met at rest and in
Table 1: General Information
presented in a technical report C514/2017. operation. Summary of the qualification is shown in Table 1. Detailed information is presented in
a technical report C515/2017. Client Treston Oy, Sorakatu 1, 20730 Turku
Table 1: General Information Contact Kimmo Lehti, +358 50 395 8562, [email protected]
Table 1: General Information
Dates of Test March 12 - 17, 2017 ( C518/2017)
Client Treston Oy, Sorakatu 1, 20730 Turku
Contact Kimmo Lehti, +358 50 395 8562, [email protected] Client Treston Oy, Sorakatu 1, 20730 Turku Cascade Metrology, Electrostatics Laboratory, Hakulintie 32,
Place of Test
Kimmo Lehti, +358 50 395 8562, [email protected] 08500 Lohja GSM +358 4456 88 599
Contact
Dates of Test February 9 – 16, 2017 Conditioning 48 hours, RH = (12 ± 3) %, T = (23 ± 2) °C
Cascade Metrology, Electrostatics Laboratory, Hakulintie 32, Dates of Test February 26th – March 1st, 2017
Place of Test Sample 1: Concept motorized ESD workstation 10349015P+TT10060-ESD
08500 Lohja GSM +358 4456 88 599 Cascade Metrology, Electrostatics Laboratory, Hakulintie 32,
Place of Test with accessories, SN 5219, 01/2017
Conditioning ISO Class 7, RH = (25 ± 5) %, T = (23 ± 3) °C 08500 Lohja GSM +358 4456 88 599 Samples under Test
Sample 2: WB811 EL ESD motorized workstation with accessories
Conditioning ISO Class 7, RH = (25 ± 5) %, T = (23 ± 3) °C SN 7154, 01/2017
Sample 1: Concept motorized ESD workstation 10349015P+TT10060-ESD
with accessories, SN 5219, 01/2017 Treston Ergo C20PU-ESD Chair, BMM2000ESD Sn /1387, HM41 Sn M1850876, Cylindrical electrode Vermason
Samples under Test Samples under Test Test Equipment
Sample 2: WB811 EL ESD motorized workstation with accessories 20015654, 9651C, 2401978/002, 02.09.2016 222008, Concentric ring electrode Vermason 222002
SN 7154, 01/2017
Particle counter Climet Cl 500 SN 956475, Temperature and humidity meter IEC 61340-2-3:2016, Edition 2.0, Electrostatics – Part 2-3: Methods of test for
Particle counter Climet Cl 500 SN 956475, Temperature and humidity meter Vaisala HM Test Equipment
Test Equipment Vaisala HM 41 SN M1850876, Sensor Vaisala HMP 113 SN M1750872 Test Method(s) determining resistance and resistivity of solid materials used to avoid electrostatic
41 SN M1850876, Sensor Vaisala HMP 113 SN M1750872 charge accumulation
EN ISO 14644-1:2015 Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments - Part
EN ISO 14644-1:2015 Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments - Part 1: Assessment Criteria IEC 61340-5-1:2016, Edition 2.0, Electrostatics – Part 5-1: Protection of electronic
Assessment Criteria 1: Classification of air cleanliness by particle concentration Assessment Criteria
Classification of air cleanliness by particle concentration devices from electrostatic phenomena
Requirements of ISO class 7 were met at rest and in operation. The requirements
Requirements of ISO class 7 were met at rest and in operation. The requirements of ISO Summary of Results The samples met the requirements of working surfaces according to IEC 61340-5-1.
Summary of Results of ISO class 6 were also met at rest with the large particle sizes > 0.5 µm.
class 6 were also met at rest with the large particle sizes > 0.5 µm. Summary of Results Resistance to groundable point and point to point resistances were below 1 × 109 Ω.
This certificate may only be reproduced in full, except with the prior written Results and observations are presented in a technical report C518/2017.
This certificate may only be reproduced in full, except with the prior written permission by Note
Note permission by issuing laboratory. The results relate only to the tested items.
issuing laboratory. The results relate only to the tested items. This certificate may only be reproduced in full, except with the prior written permission
Note
Date and place Author by issuing laboratory. The results relate only to the tested items.
Date and place Author
Date and place Author

Lohja 15.3.2017 Toni Viheriäkoski, CEO, Cascade Metrology, ESD Engineer

Lohja 15.3.2017 Toni Viheriäkoski, CEO, Cascade Metrology, ESD Engineer
Lohja 18.3.2017 Toni Viheriäkoski, CEO, Cascade Metrology, ESD Engineer

Toni Viheriäkoski Toni Viheriäkoski

Cascade metrology Oy, Hakulintie 32, 08500 Lohja Cascade metrology Oy, Hakulintie 32, 08500 Lohja Toni Viheriäkoski
[email protected] [email protected] Cascade metrology Oy, Hakulintie 32, 08500 Lohja
[email protected]

Cleanroom Suitability of Cleanroom Suitability of ESD certification

Treston Concept and WB Chair Treston Ergo
Motorized Workstations C20PU-ESD Treston WB and Concept
workstations fulfill the
ISO 14644-1, class 7 ISO 14644-1, class 7 basic requirements of IEC
61340-5-1

To obtain a copy of our certificates, please contact [email protected].

2 5
The guarantee period for products manufactured by Treston is 5 years from
! the date of delivery; this excludes workbench tops, electronic components,
custom made parts and normal wear and tear items, for which there is a years
GUARANTEE
years
GUARANTEE
guarantee period of 2 years.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 17

 Decorating with colour

Frames of workbenches, cabinets, shelving, drawer units and trolleys are all light grey RAL7035. Outside of the standard
colour range, additional colours are available on request. Please contact contact a representative or email us at: sales@
treston.com.

Colour code RAL code Doors Drawers Perforated panels

and back panels
Light grey 49* & 41** RAL 7035 (ESD) STD A/STD A/STD
Blue 07 RAL 5007 STD A/STD STD
STD = Standard factory colour, normal warehouse delivery, listed price.
A = Factory colour, delivery 15 days from the factory, listed price.

* The products ordered with the colour code 49 (RAL 7035) are entirely ESD protected. Please note the ESD protection feature of these colours will result in a
slightly darker shade of colour than the given RAL code.

**The frames of the products ordered with the colour code 41 (RAL 7035) are powder coated with a light grey ESD colour, but there are non-ESD parts in
these products, such as rails, rubber mats or castors.

The colour code is included in those product codes that

! are formed with numbers.
49 07 It is either at the end, following the hyphen (e.g. 860 804-49), or in the middle
(e.g. C 334 07 000).

Light grey Blue

Printed colours do not give a fully accurate representation of painted colours.
RAL 7035 RAL 5007
Please ask a representative about various samples.

+
Outside of the standard colour range, additional
colours are available on request.

18 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

1. Workbenches

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 19

 Concept workbench, page 22

• Multiple bench variations with advanced 500 kg

ergonomic features

• Perfectly suitable for assembly, quality

control or packing environments

• Highly adaptable to various applications

and to the needs of the user

• Superior range of accessories, easily

reconfigured

• Excellent stability, suitable for heavy loads

up to 500 kg

WB workbench, page 28 300 kg

• Aesthetic, ergonomic and easily adaptable

to a large variety of tasks and environments

• Designed for the needs of R&D, electronics

assembly and testing

• Extensive range of accessories to meet any

need. Various layout possibilities from back-
to-back to corner solutions

• Maximum load capacity 300 kg

TED electric desk, page 32 200 kg

• TED Electric Desk comes with quick, silent

and wide height adjustment

• This ergonomic sit-stand desk perfectly

suits light-duty assembly work, packing
applications, R&D and industrial offices

• The desk can be customized with

accessories which further enhance
ergonomics, free desk space and provide
order

• Maximum load capacity 200 kg

100 kg

Quick Edge workstation, page 36

• The quickest height adjustment on the

market - no electricity needed

• Can be customised for various operating

environments

• Multiple accessories available: swivel arms

for tool holders and screens, LED lights,
shelves with dividers for cartons

• Maximum load capacity 100 kg

20
TP workbench, page 38

• Standard and cost-effective workbench

300 kg
• Suitable for a wide range of tasks and
environments

• Superior range of accessories, easily

reconfigured

• Steel frame with loading capacity up to

300 kg

TPH workbench, page 44

300 kg
• Standard and cost-effective workbench
with one shelf

• Suitable for a wide range of tasks and

environments

• Essential range of accessories for basic

needs

• Steel frame with loading capacity up to

300 kg

TPB packing bench, page 48

300 kg
• Safe, economic and ergonomic all-in-one
packing bench

• Adapts and grows according to needs

max
300
KG
• 50+ accessories and add-on products
available

• Steel frame with loading capacity up to

300 kg

Workshop bench, page 50 max

300
KG
• A sturdy, heavy-duty industrial workbench

• Very stable on uneven surfaces due to

adjustable legs 750 kg

• You can build your personal workstation with

our wide range of accessories

• Worktop designed for very heavy loads,

load capacity up to 750 kg

21
 Concept workbenches

Concept workbenches are designed for the needs of the

max
500
KG
2
years
GUARANTEE
5
years
GUARANTEE
electronics industry, where ergonomic qualities are the
most important requirement. There are many possible
adjustments, all components fit together seamlessly, • Multiple bench variations with advanced
and each detail is practical in use. ergonomic features for quality control,
packing and assembly environments
The workstation adapts to the work process and the needs
of the operator. As a result all movements of the operator • Highly adaptable to various applications
can be optimised, which in turn increases performance and and the needs of the user
productivity and decreases work-related stress. • Superior range of accessories for easy
reconfiguration
Modular design provides total integration with the existing
system and the potential to flexibly adapt to changes in the • Excellent stability, suitable for heavy loads
environment. Concept workbenches are typically used in up to 500 kg
assembly, quality control and repair work.

Concept workbenches are available in allen key, hand

crank and motor adjustable versions. ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 55
Superior range of accessories available
for ergonomic Concept workstation.

Watch this animation showcasing the versatile usage options

22 https://vimeo.com/216622645
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 WORKBENCHES Concept

Concept workbench examples

Concept allen key adjustable workbench Concept motor adjustable bench

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code

1 Frame 1500 x 750 100 49 032P 1 Frame 1500 x 750 103 49 032P
1 Laminate bench top 1500 x 750 TT15075-HPL 1 Laminate bench top 1500 x 750 TT15075-HPL

Concept hand crank adjustable bench Concept ESD workstation

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code ESD

1 Frame 1500 x 750 101 49 032 1 Motor adjustable bench frame 1500 x 750 103 49 032P
1 Laminate bench top 1500 x 750 TT15075-HPL 1 Bench top ESD 1500 x 750 TT15075-ESD
2 Cable duct M750 860 044-49
1 Upright module, 1359 mm 2 x M750 903 49 001P
1 Light/balancer rail 2 x M750 918 49 006P
1 Steel shelf M750 x 300 836 028-49
1 Perforated panel M750 x 389 861 511-49
The Concept bench 1 Rotating tool panel frame with a 513 x 320 880 865-49
double arm
can be equipped
1 Perforated panel for rotating tool M500 860 951-49
with castors! frame
1 Bin rail M750 859 151-49
7 Stacking bin ESD 105 x 165 x 75 1015-4ESD
1 LCD screen holder with a double 930 49 002P
arm
1 Power rail M750 TPR7-001
Castor set Ø100 ESD Code 860 429 -00
Castor set Ø100 Code 834 734 -00 1 Treston NaturLite LED 1200 TNL1200
Load capacity with castors 300 kg. Always adjust the bench with
castors to the lowest position when the bench is moved.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 23

 WORKBENCHES Concept

Designing Concept workstation

2000 600
• Select the bench frame and the height adjustment 0, 1806, , 75
, 150 0, 9
, 1200 00
method: allen key, hand crank or motor. 1000

675-1025 hand crank

• Select a bench top to suit the frame: HPL

700-1100 motor
laminate, LPL laminate or ESD bench top.

670-1100 manual
Concept workbench frame
Workbench Bench frame, Bench frame Bench frame, Bench frame Bench frame, Bench frame
frame size allen key adjustable max load kg hand crank adjustable max load kg motor adjustable max load kg
W x D mm Code Code Code
1000 x 600 100 49 015P 500 101 49 015 200 103 49 015P 400
1000 x 750 100 49 030P 500 101 49 030 200 103 49 030P 400
1000 x 900 100 49 062P 500 101 49 062 200 103 49 062P 400
1200 x 600 100 49 016P 500 101 49 016 200 103 49 016P 400
1200 x 750 100 49 031P 500 101 49 031 200 103 49 031P 400
1200 x 900 100 49 063P 500 101 49 063 200 103 49 063P 400
1500 x 600 100 49 017P 500 101 49 017 200 103 49 017P 400
1500 x 750 100 49 032P 500 101 49 032 200 103 49 032P 400
1500 x 900 100 49 064P 500 101 49 064 200 103 49 064P 400
1800 x 600 100 49 018P 500 101 49 018 200 103 49 018P 400
1800 x 750 100 49 033P 500 101 49 033 200 103 49 033P 400
1800 x 900 100 49 065P 500 101 49 065 200 103 49 065P 400
2000 x 600 100 49 019P 500 103 49 019P 400
2000 x 750 100 49 034P 500 103 49 034P 400
2000 x 900 100 49 066P 500 103 49 066P 400
Bench height 670 - 1100 mm 675 - 1025 mm 700 - 1100 mm
steplessly adjustable

Concept bench tops

Size W x D mm Code HPL Code LPL Code ESD
1000 x 600 TT10060-HPL TT10060-LPL TT10060-ESD
Laminate bench top -HPL 1000 x 750 TT10075-HPL TT10075-LPL TT10075-ESD
• Light grey high pressure laminate
1000 x 900 TT10090-HPL TT10090-LPL TT10090-ESD
• Plastic edging 1200 x 600 TT12060-HPL TT12060-LPL TT12060-ESD
• Thickness 25 mm 1200 x 750 TT12075-HPL TT12075-LPL TT12075-ESD
1230 x 750 TT12375-HPL TT12375-LPL TT12375-ESD
1200 x 900 TT12090-HPL TT12090-LPL TT12090-ESD
Laminate bench top -LPL
1230 x 900 TT12390-HPL TT12390-LPL TT12390-ESD
• Light grey low presssure laminate
1500 x 600 TT15060-HPL TT15060-LPL TT15060-ESD
• Plastic edging
1500 x 750 TT15075-HPL TT15075-LPL TT15075-ESD
• Thickness 25 mm
1530 x 750 TT15375-HPL TT15375-LPL TT15375-ESD
1500 x 900 TT15090-HPL TT15090-LPL TT15090-ESD
1530 x 900 TT15390-HPL TT15390-LPL TT15390-ESD
ESD bench top
1806 x 600 TT18060-HPL TT18060-LPL TT18060-ESD
• Light grey laminate surface
1806 x 750 TT18075-HPL TT18075-LPL TT18075-ESD
• Grey edging
1836 x 750 TT18375-HPL TT18375-LPL TT18375-ESD
• Thickness 25 mm
1806 x 900 TT18090-HPL TT18090-LPL TT18090-ESD
• Semi-conductive (ESD)
1836 x 900 TT18390-HPL TT18390-LPL TT18390-ESD
2000 x 600 TT20060-HPL TT20060-LPL TT20060-ESD
2000 x 750 TT20075-HPL TT20075-LPL TT20075-ESD
2000 x 900 TT20090-HPL TT20090-LPL TT20090-ESD

24 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES Concept

Concept extension benches

2
1 3

1. Workbench frame,
2. Extension bench frame
3. Corner bench frame

Concept extension bench frame (right) Concept corner bench frame (right)
Name Size Max Code Name Size Max Code
W x D mm load kg W x D mm load kg
Extension bench frame 1500 x 600 250 112 49 001P Corner bench frame for allen key 1000 x 600 250 111 49 001P
Extension bench frame 1500 x 750 250 112 49 002P adjustable bench 600 mm deep

Extension bench frame 1800 x 750 250 112 49 003P Corner bench frame for allen key 1200 x 600 250 111 49 002P
adjustable bench 750 mm deep
Extension bench frame 1500 x 900 250 112 49 007P
Extension bench frame 1800 x 900 250 112 49 008P

Concept extension bench frame (left) Concept corner bench frame (left)
Name Size Max Code Name Size Max Code
W x D mm load kg W x D mm load kg
Extension bench frame 1500 x 600 250 112 49 004P Corner bench frame for allen key 1000 x 600 250 111 49 003P
Extension bench frame 1500 x 750 250 112 49 005P adjustable bench 600 mm deep

Extension bench frame 1800 x 750 250 112 49 006P Corner bench frame for allen key 1200 x 600 250 111 49 004P
adjustable bench 750 mm deep
Extension bench frame 1500 x 900 250 112 49 009P
Extension bench frame 1800 x 900 250 112 49 010P

Transport skate
With a transport skate, one person can easily move
benches. For long-distance moving, you will need two
transport skates.

Name Max load kg Code Code ESD

Transport skate 180 854 061-41 854 061-49
Compatible with tables with a max depth of 750 mm.

Battery set for Concept motor adjustable frames and TED electric desks
The smaller sized Concept and TED workbenches equipped with castors, electric height adjustment, and battery set are an
excellent option for workspaces where you need a compact size, easily height adjustable, and mobile work surface. You get
all the ergonomic benefits of easy, electric height adjustment, and freedom of mobility with the battery set – no need to worry
if the power cables are long enough for moving the work surface around the workspace.

Name Code
Battery set BSC001
Suitable for Concept motor adjustable frames and TED electric desks. Battery
set sold only to EU countries.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 25

 WORKBENCHES Concept

Concept upright tubes

Accessories are attached to the Concept bench with the aid of upright tubes or a complete, upright tube module.

The module includes upright tubes, horizontal tube/tubes, corner bracket pair and straight bracket (if module has more than
one horizontal tube). The tubes or the module are attached to the back of the bench.

Upright tubes Straight bracket Corner bracket

Horizontal tube
Name Size Length (l) Code
W x D mm mm
Upright tube 30 x 60 500 860 991-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 800 860 142-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 996 860 367-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 1359 860 024-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 1582 860 025-49
h=
Horizontal tube M500 860 819-49 Upright tube
Horizontal tube M750 847 402-49 l=
Horizontal tube M900 840 104-49
Horizontal tube M1000 854 656-49
Horizontal tube M1200 854 655-49
Horizontal tube M1350 850 914-49
Horizontal tube M1500 854 654-49
Horizontal tube M1800 854 657-49
Corner bracket pair 848 336-49
Straight bracket 851 827-49

Upright tube modules and compatibility

Suitable for bench widths Code Code
C = Concept l =1359 mm l =1582 mm
1000 1200 1500 1800 2000 h =1075 mm h =1300 mm
1 x M750 C C C C C 900 49 001P 900 49 002P
The modular (M) size refers
1 x M900 C C C C C 901 49 001P 901 49 002P
to the distance between two
2 x M500 C C 902 49 001P 902 49 002P
upright tubes from the middle
2 x M750 C C C 903 49 001P 903 49 002P of the tube. The modular size
2 x M900 C C 904 49 001P 904 49 002P is used to find the appropriate
3 x M500 C C 905 49 001P 905 49 002P accessories.
4 x M500 C 906 49 001P 906 49 002P
The upright tubes can also be used separately without the
h = module's height measured from Concept bench's top surface.
horizontal tubes. In this case, please order the end cap 900370-
Load capacity 100 kg / module spacing. 00 for the upright tubes (1 pcs per upright tube).
Upright tube modules are available also with 996 mm uprights (h=714 mm).
Item codes: 90X 49 003P.
Upright tube modules include 5 pcs of cable clips for easy cable
management. + Accessories from page 55
Superior range of accessories available for ergonomic
Concept workstation.
Aluminium bracket
Name Code
Aluminium bracket 846 554-00
A separate aluminium bracket (846 554-00) can be used to attach a single
tube to any bench.

CC cable clip set CC5

Name Suitable for Code
Cable clip set (5 pcs) Upright tubes CC5
For easy cable management, suitable for up to five cables.
Aluminium bracket CC cable clip set

26 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES Concept

Concept also accommodates the most

demanding packaging needs!

Whatever the packaging need, you can build it from

Concept and its modular elements.

Modules fit together seamlessly, giving you an opportunity

to create a complete packaging solution, perfectly
matching your needs. Building packaging combinations
from varying, yet standard modules makes it possible to
create an ergonomicly well-functioning packaging solution
which is also robust and economic. No need for costly
extra modifications or compromises!

READ MORE ABOUT

Treston packing benches
Largest number of accessories on the market.
from our separate brochure.

treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 27

 WB workbenches

The WB workbench has been designed for use in

max
300
KG
2years
GUARANTEE
5years
GUARANTEE
demanding assembly environments. Besides offering
modularity and great ergonomics, the bench is
aesthetically pleasing.
• Designed for the needs of R&D, electronics
Electric motor, manual hand crank or allen key height assembly and testing
adjustment cater for standing or seated users, while the • Ergonomic and easily adaptable to a large
generous worktop depth and broad accessory range variety of tasks and environments
ensure that everything is within easy reach. Another feature
of this new design is the flush bench footprint; benches can • Extensive range of accessories to meet any
be placed side-by-side, back-to-back, or right up against need
walls with no unnecessary gaps. You can design your • Various layout possibilities from back-to-
workstation to fit your needs perfectly. back to corner solutions

Worktop height can be adjusted between 700-1100 mm.

The adjustment system in both cases utilises interlocking
aluminium profiles, providing a strong, rigid frame. Steel
frame parts are epoxy powder coated light grey paint. ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 72
Worktops are of 25 mm laminated particle board, Extensive range of accessories available
adjustable feet are provided for fine levelling. for ergonomic WB workstation.

Watch this animation showcasing the versatile usage options

28 https://vimeo.com/219470050
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 WORKBENCHES WB

WB workbench examples

WB mobile industrial office workstation WB packing workstation

Qty Name Code Qty Name Code
1 WB electric adjustable bench 1100 WB811 EL 1 WB electric adjustable bench 1500 WB815 EL
1 Castor set LCS100 1 WB side worktop WB804ST
1 Upright profile AL2X110W 1 Upright profile AL2X150W
1 LCD bracket MH 1 Support bracket HSB150
1 Bin profile BP100 1 Treston NaturLite Led 1200 TNL1200
1 Auxiliary steel shelf A5 ASSA5 1 Shelf ALH ALH150
2 Treston NaturLite Led Wing 500 TNL500W 1 Divider hoops PDH
1 Light steel cabinet LMC01 1 Recycling material bin PRMB
1 Cover LMCK2 1 Power rail 331, 3 sockets + 2 x USB TPR3-001
1 Bottle holder CH 1 Lower shelf AT AT150 WB
1 Light steel cabinet LMC01
1 Cover LMCK2

WB assembly workstation WB ESD workstation

Qty Name Code Qty Name Code ESD
1 WB electric adjustable bench 1800 WB818 EL 1 WB electric adjustable bench 1800 WB818 EL ESD
1 WB side worktop WB804 ST 1 Earthing box ESD J6603
1 Upright profile AL2X180W 1 Upright profile AL2X180W
1 Accessory frame AKK AKK180 1 Support bracket HSB180
1 Support bracket HSB180 1 Treston NaturLite Led 1200 TNL1200
1 Treston NaturLite Led 1200 TNL1200 1 Shelf ALH ESD ALH180 ESD
1 Shelf ALH ALH180 1 Accessory frame AKK ESD AKK180
1 Power rail 683, 5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB TPR7-001 1 Perforated panel ESD ARL70
1 Adjustable shelf ASH ASH70 2 Bin profile ESD BP100 ESD
1 Light steel cabinet LMC02 2 Auxiliary steel shelf A5 ASSA5
1 Cover LMCK2 1 Swivel arm with tray ESD AKV400 ESD
1 LCD swivel arm MA 1 LCD swivel arm MA
1 Swivel arm with tray AKV400 1 Light steel cabinet ESD LMC02 ESD
2 Bin profile BP100 1 Cover LMCK2
1 Auxiliary steel shelf A4 ASSA4 1 Magnifying lamp Wave LED ESD TWL ESD

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 29

 WORKBENCHES WB

Designing WB workbench
• Select the height adjustment method: allen key, electric
or crank.

700-1100 mm
• Select a bench top to suit the frame: laminate or ESD
bench top.

WB allen key adjustable bench

Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
1073 x 800 300 WB811 WB811 ESD
1500 x 800 300 WB815 WB815 ESD
1800 x 800 300 WB818 WB818 ESD
We recommend using cable tidy WBCT with WB allen key adjustable
benches.

WB electric adjustable bench 700-1100 mm

Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
1073 x 800 300 WB811 EL WB811 EL ESD
1500 x 800 300 WB815 EL WB 815 EL ESD
1800 x 800 300 WB818 EL WB818 EL ESD
Adjustment speed using the motor is 19 seconds min. to max.
Cable tidy as standard.

WB crank adjustable bench

700-1100 mm

Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD

1073 x 800 200 WB811 C WB811 C ESD
1500 x 800 200 WB815 C WB815 C ESD
1800 x 800 200 WB818 C WB818 C ESD
Cable tidy as standard.

The WB bench
Laminate bench top can be equipped
• 25 mm low pressure laminate
• Light grey surface
with castors!
• Plastic edging

ESD bench top

• Light grey laminate surface Castor set Ø100 ESD Code LCS100 ESD
• Grey edging Castor set Ø100 Code LCS100
• Thickness 25 mm
• Semi-conductive (ESD) Load capacity with castors is the same as the bench loading capacity
with adjustable screws. We recommend using the cable tidy WBCT
with WB Allen-key adjustable benches. Always adjust the bench
with castors to the lowest position when the bench is moved.

30 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES WB

WB extension benches
+ Accessories from page 72
Extensive range of accessories available for ergonomic
WB workstation..

1. WB side worktop 2. WB corner worktop

This side worktop can be installed on either the right or left A corner worktop can be used with two WB benches to
hand side of a WB bench to increase the surface area. create a 90° angle setup. This unit consists of a worktop
Installation can be either at the same height, or lower and all necessary components. It requires no additional leg
than the main worktop with the brackets provided. Load frames, simply mounting to the standard benches with the
capacity is 40 kg, and it is suitable for all WB models in the brackets provided. Load capacity for this worktop is 80 kg.
range. Doesn't suit crank adjustable bench. Suitable for WB EL to
order.

Size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD Size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
400 x 800 40 WB804 ST WB804 ST ESD 1154 x 1154 80 WB1212 CT WB1212 CT ESD

1073 1154
800

WB811 WB1212 CT
1154
50
0

1 2
1073

WB811

800

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 31

 Electric Desk TED for industrial use

Treston Electric Desk TED adjusts to different heights

max
200
KG
2
years
GUARANTEE
quickly and silently, extending from as low as 630
mm all the way up to 1270 mm. Accommodating a
wide range of heights serves especially well in light-duty
• Quick, silent and wide height adjustment
assembly work and packing applications, where the
630-1270 mm (range 64 cm)
handled items can vary from big to small. A desk with a
quick and wide adjustment range helps keep employees • This ergonomic sit-stand desk perfectly
working comfortably and ergonomically in all situations. suits light-duty assembly work, packing
applications, R&D and industrial offices.
The desk serves also in R&D laboratories as well as industrial
offices well, as it withstands loads of 200 kg, and the desk
can be customized with a range of accessories. The above-
and below-desk accessories further enhance ergonomics,
free desk space and provide order.
ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 55
Comprehensive range of accessories
available for ergonomic TED workstation

Watch the 2 min animation showcasing the features

32 https://vimeo.com/513555408
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 WORKBENCHES TED

TED desk examples

TED industrial office desk TED industrial office desk

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Treston Electric Desk 1500 x 800 TED815-41 1 Treston Electric Desk 1100 x 800 TED811-41
1 Upright Tube Pair with a flange 400 TTP400-49 1 Upright Tube Pair with a flange 790 TTP790-49
2 Treston Display Bracket for light duty TDB-49 1 Perforated back panel M900 861 516-49
1 Drawer unit ESD 30/22 859 340-49 1 LCD monitor holder for perforated panel 890 715-49
1 Drawer unit 30 fastening set for TED 855 057-49 2 Treston NaturLite Led Wing 500 TNL500W
1 Bottle holder ESD for upright tube Ø100 859 063-49 2 Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated 159 x 210 ASSA5PP
panel
1 Bottle holder ESD for upright tube Ø100 859 063-49
1 Laptop/printer shelf ESD 365 x 365 930 49 001P
1 Cable clip set for upright tubes CC5
1 Power rail 836 TPR9-010

TED ESD workstation TED packing station

Qty Name Size mm Code ESD Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Treston Electric Desk ESD 1500 x 800 TED815-49 1 Treston Electric Desk 1800 x 800 TED818-41
1 Upright Tube Pair with a flange 790 TTP790-49 1 Upright Tube Pair with a flange 790 TTP790-49
1 Light and balancer rail ESD 918 49 011P 1 Paper roll holder set for upright tube 859 041-49P
1 Treston IntoLite Led 850 TIL850 1 Pair of paper roll dividers RD25
1 Perforated back panel M1350 861 521-49 1 Cutter 1350 PPC135
1 Treston Display Bracket for light duty TDB-49 1 Steel shelf ESD M1500 1490 x 300 890 756-49
1 Curved bin rail ESD with arm 770 x 54 929 49 002P 3 Divider pair 285 x 190 010 004-49
1 Steel shelf ESD M1350 1340 x 300 860 787-49 1 Light and balancer rail ESD 918 49 006P
1 Aluminium bin rail M1350 BP1350C 1 Treston NaturLite LED 1180 TNL1200
2 Auxiliary steel shelf 159 x 210 ASSA5 1 Rotating tool frame ESD, double arm 513 x 320 880 865-49P
1 Magnifying lamp Wave LED ESD TWL ESD 1 Perforated panel ESD 470 x 300 860 951-49
1 Drawer unit ESD 30/15 859 330-49 1 Recycling material bin PRMB
1 Drawer unit 30 fastening set for TED 855 057-49 1 Tool holder box PPH TXL
1 Power rail 836 TPR9-010

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 33

 WORKBENCHES TED

Designing TED desk

800 mm

• TED desk consists of the frame and the bench top.

• Equip with accessories. To equip TED with above-desk
accessories, select first the upright tube pair.

630 -1270 mm
TED Electric Desk
Size W x D mm Module Max Code Code ESD
load kg
900 x 800 M750 200 TED809-41 TED809-49
1100 x 800 M900 200 TED811-41 TED811-49
1800 mm
1500 x 800 M1350 200 TED815-41 TED815-49 0/1500/
900/110
1800 x 800 M1500 200 TED818-41 TED818-49

Laminate bench top

• 25 mm low pressure laminate
• Light grey surface
• Plastic edging

ESD bench top

• Light grey laminate surface
• Grey edging
• Thickness 25 mm
• Semi-conductive (ESD)

Upright Tube Pair with a flange

Treston upright tubes enable TED electric desk to be
accessorised in many ways. Fitted on worktop with screws.

Size W x D x H mm Code ESD

70 x 100 x 418 TTP400-49
70 x 100 x 793 TTP790-49
70 x 100 x 997 TTP990-49

+ Accessories from page 55

Wide range of accessories available for Treston Electric Desk
TED.

Upright Tube Pair with a flange

34 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES TED

Lower shelf for TED desk

400 mm deep lower shelf for many purposes. Includes
back lip. Fitted under worktop with screws. The lower shelf
can also be equipped with divider hoops.

Size Suitable for Max Code

W x D mm load kg
465 x 400 All TED benches 60 LST500-49
715 x 400 TED811, TED,815, TED818 60 LST750-49
865 x 400 TED815, TED818 60 LST900-49
965 x 400 TED815, TED818 60 LST1000-49
1165 x 400 TED818 60 LST1200-49
1315 x 400 TED818 60 LST1350-49
Divider hoops set (4 pcs) 400 x 400 PDH400-49

Battery set for Concept motor adjustable frames and TED electric desks
The smaller sized Concept and TED workbenches equipped with castors, electric height adjustment, and battery set are an
excellent option for workspaces where you need a compact size, easily height adjustable, and mobile work surface. You get
all the ergonomic benefits of easy, electric height adjustment, and freedom of mobility with the battery set – no need to worry
if the power cables are long enough for moving the work surface around the workspace.

Battery set
Name Code
Battery set BSC001
Suitable for Concept motor adjustable frames and TED electric desks. Battery
set sold only to EU countries.

The TED desk

can be equipped
with castors!

Castor set Ø100 ESD Code LCS100 ESD

Castor set Ø100 Code LCS100
Always adjust the bench with castors to the lowest position when the bench is moved.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 35

 Treston Quick Edge workstation

The easier the workstation’s height adjustment gets,

max
100
KG
2
years
GUARANTEE
the more likely you will adjust it. Meet the industrial
workstation with the quickest height adjustment on the
market. Workstation height is adjusted with a completely
• Extremely wide height adjustment range
new, innovative, and user-friendly mechanism. The patent
570–1300 mm
pending height adjustment solution minimises the height
exchange time between handled items and makes daily • Patent pending solution: Adjust the optimal
work more fluent, efficient, and ergonomic. height effortlessly for every task / produced
item
This industrial workstation is designed, for example, for
packing and logistic centres, where the desk height
adjustment is done according to the differently sized
cartons. The Treston Quick Edge Workstation adapts for
operators of different standing heights and increases both
performance and ergonomics. ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 55
Comprehensive range of accessories
available for Treston Quick Edge workstation

Watch the 2 min video showcasing the features

36 https://vimeo.com/679903135
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 WORKBENCHES Quick Edge

Designing Quick Edge workstation

• Quick Edge workstation consists of the frame, the bench
top and upright profiles.
• Equip with M1200 wide accessories, swivel arms or
printer platforms.
• Quick Egde workstation can be used in EPAs with
grounding set TQE-ESD.

1930 mm
M1200 700 m
m
Quick Edge workstation
Size W x D mm Module Max load kg Code
1200 x 700 M1200 100* TQEW712-41

570 -1300 mm
Static load capacity for bench top 100 kg, total load capacity for frame
300 kg.

The new, innovative, patent pending height adjustment solution minimises the height exchange time between handled items and makes daily
work more fluent, efficient, and ergonomic. Bench top is adjusted without load due to the constant force springs as an adjustment mechanism.

Grounding set for Treston Quick Edge workstation

Name Code
Grounding set for Treston Quick Edge workstation TQE-ESD
With this grounding set you can use Treston Quick Edge workstation in EPAs.

Spring set for Treston Quick Edge Workstation

Name Code
Spring set for Treston Quick Edge Workstation TQES
Grounding set for Treston Quick Edge workstation
Replace the constant force spring set at least after every 10 000 operating
cycles.

Quick Edge
workstation can
be equipped with
castors.

Castor set Ø100 Code LCS100

Castor set ESD Ø 100 Code LCS100 ESD

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 37

 TP workbenches

The classically designed TP workbench is the ideal basic

bench, the simplest and the most cost-effective option in
max
300
KG
5
years
GUARANTEE

our range of workbenches. TP workbenches are standard

benches that are suitable for a broad range of tasks and
environments when fitted with accessories: testing, packing, • Standard and cost-effective workbench
repairing, inspecting. TP bench is guaranteed for regular
• Suitable for a wide range of tasks and
use with loads up to 300 kg.
environments
This modular system enables high quality working • Superior range of accessories, easily
environment. Customise your workstation to your own reconfigured
requirements. • Steel frame with loading capacity up to
300 kg
Stepless height adjustment
The height of workbenches in our TP range can be steplessly
adjusted from 650 to 900 mm, which makes these benches
suitable for work while sitting or standing. Packing is a
ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 55
typical example of work where the workbench height must
be set correctly for the height of the user. Superior range of accessories available for
ergonomic TP workstation

Watch this animation showcasing the versatile usage options

38 https://vimeo.com/219469789
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 WORKBENCHES TP

TP workbench examples

TP workstation TP packing workstation

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code

1 TP workbench 1200 x 700 TP712 1 TP workbench 1800 x 700 TP718
1 Accessory frame 1200 TPK12-49 1 Accessory frame 1800 TPK18-49
2 Upright tube 1359 860 024-49 1 Upright tube module 2 x M900/1582 904 49 002P
1 Horizontal tube M1200 854 655-49 1 Light/balancer rail 2 x M900/1800 918 49 008P
1 Corner bracket pair 848 336-49 1 Treston NaturLite 1200 TNL1200
1 Tiltable top shelf M1200 x 300 TTSM12003-49 1 LCD screen holder 930 49 002P
1 Light and balancer rail M1200 918 49 010P 1 Equipment tray 500 x 250 x 125 928 49 002P
1 Treston IntoLite Led 850 TIL850 1 Perforated back panel M900 x 389 861 516-49
1 Recycling material bin 530 x 280 x 585 PRMB
1 Roll holder set M900 890 548-49P
1 Tiltable top shelf M900 x 300 TTSM9003-49
1 Divider hoops set 300 x 400 PDH300-49
1 Aluminium bin rail M900 BP900C
2 Auxiliary steel shelf 159 x 254 x 50 ASSA5
1 Auxiliary steel shelf 217 x 298 x 20 ASSA4
1 Pull-out steel shelf for printer 500 x 510 x 515 PSP50
1 Shelf for packing material M900 x 600 SPM900-49
1 Adjustable fastening set under worktop SPMAF-49
1 Divider hoops set SPM-shelf 400 x 280 PDH600
1 Power rail TPR9-001

See options for rotating tool panel with perforated panel and other accessories
on page 62.

TP repair workstation
Qty Name Size mm Code
1 TP workbench 1500 x 700 TP715 The TP bench
1 Accessory frame 1500 TPK15-49 can be equipped
1 Upright tube module 2 x M750/1582 903 49 002P
with castors!
1 Light/balancer rail 2 x M750/1500 918 49 006P
1 Treston NaturLite 1200 TNL1200
1 Tiltable top shelf M750 x 300 TTSM7503-49
2 Accessory box 220 x 300 ABTTS3-41
Castor set Ø100, code 834 734 -00
1 Lower shelf 1380 x 500 AT 150TPH
Castor set Ø100 ESD, code 860 429 -00
1 Perforated back panel M750 x 1003 861 514-07
Insert set (required to fit castors), code 853 289-00
2 Aluminium bin rail M750 BP750C
8 Stacking bin 149 x 192 x 105 1520-5/6
Load capacity with castors 150 kg. We recommend using the
1 Perforated tool cabinet M750 x 255 x 900 852 629-07
accessory frame (page 42) with the castors. Always adjust the bench
1 Drawer unit 45/14-1 450 x 520 x 140 603 49 001 with castors to the lowest position when the bench is moved.
1 Power rail 468 TPR4-001

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 39

 WORKBENCHES TP

Designing TP workstation

• Select laminate or ESD version of the bench

650-900 mm
• Equip with accessories. To equip TP with above-desk
accessories, select first the upright tubes.

TP workbench
50
0/ m
Bench size Max Code Code ESD / 1800 m
90 700
0m 00 / 12 00/ 1500
W x D mm load kg m / 700 / 10
700 x 500 150 TP507 TP507 ESD
1000 x 500 150 TP510 TP510 ESD
1500 x 500 150 TP515 TP515 ESD
1000 x 700 300 TP710 TP710 ESD
1200 x 700 300 TP712 TP712 ESD Laminate bench top
1500 x 700 300 TP715 TP715 ESD • 25 mm low pressure laminate
1800 x 700 300 TP718 TP718 ESD • Light grey surface
1500 x 900 300 TP915 TP915 ESD • Plastic edging
1800 x 900 300 TP918 TP918 ESD

ESD bench top

• Light grey laminate surface
• Grey edging
• Thickness 25 mm
1. Lower shelf for TP • Semi-conductive (ESD)
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Lower shelf 1080 x 500 50 AT 120TPH
Lower shelf 1380 x 500 50 AT 150TPH
Lower shelf 1680 x 500 50 AT 180TPH
Not enough space above the workstation? Then utilise the space below. The
1
lower shelf for TP bench simply hangs on the horizontal bars.

2. Lower steel shelf LSS

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Lower shelf 1418 x 460 30 LSS150
Lower shelf 1718 x 460 30 LSS180
2
Low M-divider hoops 460 x 315 LDH
(4 pcs/set)
Hangs on the horizontal bars. Can be equipped with steplessly adjustable low
M-divider hoops.

3. Side worktop
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
3
Side worktop 400 x 700 35 TP704 ST
Side worktop 400 x 900 35 TP904 ST
Easy to fix to the legs of the bench. Can be fixed on the left or right side of the
bench and brackets placed either above or underneath. Height adjustable
575-900 mm from the floor.

40 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES TP

TP extension benches
Line extension TP-L
TP715 L
Each standard TP bench may also be supplied as a line TP715
extension. Fitted to the side of the main bench.

Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD

1000 x 700 150 TP710 L TP710 L ESD
1200 x 700 150 TP712 L TP712 L ESD
1500 x 700 150 TP715 L TP715 L ESD
1800 x 700 150 TP718 L TP718 L ESD
1500 x 900 150 TP915 L TP915 L ESD
1800 x 900 150 TP918 L TP918 L ESD

TP715 TP510 K
Angle extension TP-K
Each standard TP bench may also be supplied as an angle
extension. Fitted to front angle of main bench.

Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD

1000 x 500 150 TP510 K TP510 K ESD
1200 x 700 150 TP712 K TP712 K ESD

Corner workbench TP-KK TP707 KK

TP715* TP715*
A corner workbench can be used with two TP benches (with
one H-frame pair) to create a 90 °angle setup. TP KK unit
consists of a worktop, two H-frames and a leg in the middle.
Front side 565 mm.

Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD

1100 x 1100 150 TP707 KK TP707 KK ESD * Workbench with one H-frame pair.
1300 x 1300 150 TP909 KK TP909 KK ESD

SAP trolley
TP bench style construction. Height adjustment with allen key between 650-900 mm. Swivel castors (Ø 100 mm), two of
which have brakes. Load capacity 150 kg. Lower shelf, extra shelf and push handle available separately.

Name Size Max Code Code ESD

W x D mm load kg
Trolley 700 x 500 150 SAP507 SAP507 ESD
Trolley 1000 x 700 150 SAP710 SAP710 ESD
Lower shelf 700 x 500 40 AT507 AT507 ESD
Lower shelf 1000 x 700 40 AT710 AT710 ESD
Extra shelf 700 x 500 40 LT507 LT507 ESD
Extra shelf 1000 x 700 40 LT710 LT710 ESD
Handle depth 500 PUSH50 PUSH50
Handle depth 700 PUSH70 PUSH70

SAP trolley with AT lower shelf, LT extra shelf and PUSH handle

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 41

 WORKBENCHES TP

TP upright tubes Horizontal Straight bracket

Corner bracket
tube

Accessories are attached to the TP bench with the aid of

upright tubes or a complete, upright tube module.

The module includes upright tubes, horizontal tube/tubes, Upright

corner bracket pair and straight bracket (if module has tube
more than one horizontal tube). The upright tubes or the l=
upright tube module are attached to the back of the TP
bench with accessory frame (ordered separately). When
using three upright tubes with the bench, we recommend
using the complete upright tube modules.

Accessory frame

+ Accessories from page 55

Superior range of accessories available for ergonomic
TP workstation.

Accessory frame
Bench frame Fixing points for uprights Code
width mm
1000 1 x M900, 1 x M1000 TPK10-49
1200 1 x M750, 1 x M900, 1 x M1200 TPK12-49
1500 1 x M1500, 2 x M750 TPK15-49
1800 1 x M1800, 2 x M900 TPK18-49
Upright tubes or the upright tube module are always attached to TP bench
with accessory frame. The accessory frame cannot be used on line or corner
extensions. Accessory frame

Upright tubes
Name Size Length Code
W x D mm (l) mm
Upright tube 30 x 60 500 860 991-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 800 860 142-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 996 860 367-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 1359 860 024-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 1582 860 025-49
Horizontal tube M500 860 819-49
Horizontal tube M750 847 402-49
Horizontal tube M900 840 104-49
Horizontal tube M1000 854 656-49
Horizontal tube M1200 854 655-49
Horizontal tube M1350 850 914-49
Horizontal tube M1500 854 654-49 Usable height of the upright tube
Horizontal tube M1800 854 657-49
Corner bracket pair 848 336-49
Straight bracket 851 827-49

42 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES TP

Upright tube modules and compatibility

Suitable for bench widths Code Code
TP = TP workbench l =1359 mm l =1582 mm
1000 1200 1500 1800 2000
1 x M750 TP 900 49 001P 900 49 002P
1 x M900 TP TP 901 49 001P 901 49 002P
2 x M500 902 49 001P 902 49 002P
2 x M750 TP 903 49 001P 903 49 002P
2 x M900 TP 904 49 001P 904 49 002P
3 x M500 905 49 001P 905 49 002P
4 x M500 906 49 001P 906 49 002P
Load capacity 100 kg / module spacing. Upright tube modules include 5 pcs
of cable clips for easy cable management.

The upright tubes or the upright tube module are attached to the
back of the TP bench with accessory frame

Aluminium bracket
Name Code
Aluminium bracket 846 554-00
Bracket can be used to attached a single tube to the bench.

Upright tube with aluminium bracket attached to the bench.

CC cable clip set CC5

Name Suitable for Code
Cable clip set (incl. 5 pcs) Upright tubes CC5
For easy cable management, suitable for up to five cables.

CC cable clip set CC5

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 43

 TPH workbenches

The TPH workbench includes a pair of uprights and one

shelf; composing one of our best selling workstations.
max
300
KG
2
years
GUARANTEE
5years
GUARANTEE

It has its own range of accessories, also in stock, and

covering the essential, basic needs of any professional
workstation. • Standard and cost-effective workbench with
one shelf
Stepless height adjustment
• Suitable for a wide range of tasks and
The height of TPH workbenches can be steplessly adjusted environments
with allen-key from 650 to 900 mm, which makes these
benches suitable for work while sitting or standing. The • Essential range of accessories for basic
height adjustment of the laminate shelf is between 1080- needs
1550 mmm. Load capacity for the bench top is 300 kg • Steel frame with loading capacity up to
and for the shelf 50 kg even load. 300 kg

ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 77
Essential range of accessories available
for ergonomic TPH workstation.

44 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES TPH

TPH workbench examples

TPH workbench TPH workstation

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code
1 TPH workbench 1500 x 700 TPH715 1 TPH workbench 1200 x 700 TPH712
1 Lower steel shelf 1418 x 460 LSS150 1 Tool and lighting support 1200 x 600 KT120
1 Divider hoop set 460 x 315 LDH 1 Treston IntoLite Led 850 TIL850
1 Perforated panel 1115 x 750 RL120
1 Connector set RK1

TPH workstation TPH ESD workstation

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code ESD
1 TPH workbench 1800 x 700 TPH718 1 TPH workbench ESD 1800 x 700 TPH718 ESD
1 Tool and lighting support 1800 x 600 KT180 1 Tool and lighting support 1800 x 600 KT180
1 Treston IntoLite Led 850 TIL850 1 Treston NaturLite Led 1200 TNL1200
2 Aluminium bin profile 1705 BP180 1 Perforated panel 1715 x 750 RL180
1 Metal shelf 1719 x 145 TH180 1 Connector set RK1
1 Tool holder box 400 x 300 x 150 PPH TXL 3 Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated 159 x 243 x 56 ASSA5PP
3 Auxiliary steel shelf 217 x 298 x 20 ASSA4 panel
6 Stacking bin 149 x 192 x 105 1520-5 2 Hook R46 839 086-51
6 Stacking bin 149 x 250 x 130 1525-5 1 Hook R42 838357-51
8 Stacking bin 105 x 165 x 75 1015-5 3 Stacking bin 1525-4ESD
1 Power rail 1700 TPR17-001 1 LCD monitor holder for perforated panel 890 715-49
1 Side worktop 400 x 700 TP704ST 2 Swivel arm with tray ESD 460 x 210 CKV400 ESD
1 Component rack ESD 455 x 200 x 290 EPL12 ESD
18 Stacking bin 105 x 165 x 75 1015-4ESD
1 CPU holder ESD 180-225 x 450x50 854 440-49
1 Magnifying lamp Wave LED ESD TWL ESD
1 Drawer unit 45/26-1 450 x 520 x 260 604 49 001

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 45

 WORKBENCHES TPH

Designing TPH workstation

310 mm

• TPH workbench comes with one shelf and a pair of

uprights
• Select model either with ESD or laminate bench top 700 /
900 m
m
• Equip with accessories.

1080-1550 mm
Workbench TPH
Bench size Shelf size Max Code Code ESD
W x D mm W x D mm load kg
1200 x 700 1200 x 310 300 TPH712 TPH712 ESD
1500 x 700 1500 x 310 300 TPH715 TPH715 ESD
1800 x 700 1800 x 310 300 TPH718 TPH718 ESD
1500 x 900 1500 x 310 300 TPH915 TPH915 ESD
1800 x 900 1800 x 310 300 TPH918 TPH918 ESD
00 mm
500 / 18
1200 / 1

Laminate bench top

• 25 mm low pressure laminate
• Light grey surface
• Plastic edging

ESD bench top

• Light grey laminate surface
• Grey edging
• Thickness 25 mm
• Semi-conductive (ESD)

TPH uprights

1. Lower shelf AT
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
1
Lower shelf 1080 x 500 50 AT 120TPH
Lower shelf 1380 x 500 50 AT 150TPH
Lower shelf 1680 x 500 50 AT 180TPH
The lower shelf for TPH bench simply hangs on the horizontal bars.

2. Lower steel shelf LSS

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
2
Lower shelf 1418 x 460 30 LSS150
Lower shelf 1718 x 460 30 LSS180
Low M-divider 460 x 315 LDH
hoops (4 pcs/set)
Hangs on the horizontal bars. Can be equipped with steplessly adjustable
low M-divider hoops.

46 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES TPH

3. Side worktop
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
3
Side worktop 400 x 700 35 TP704 ST
Side worktop 400 x 900 35 TP904 ST
Easy to fix to the legs of the bench. Can be fixed on the left or right side of the
bench and brackets placed either above or underneath. Height adjustable
575-900 mm from the floor.

TPH715* TPH707 KK TPH715*

Corner workbench TPH KK
Bench size W x D mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
1100 x 1100 150 TPH707 KK TPH707 KK ESD
1300 x 1300 150 TPH909 KK TPH909 KK ESD
A corner workbench can be used with two TPH benches (with one H-frame
pair) to create a 90 °angle setup. TPH KK unit consists of a worktop, two
H-frames and a leg in the middle. Front side 565 mm.

* Workbench with one H-frame pair.

+ Accessories from page 77

Superior range of accessories available for ergonomic
TPH workstation.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 47

 TPB packing benches

This packing table adapts and grows according to your 300

KG
max
2years
5years
needs. You don’t need to know what your business will GUARANTEE GUARANTEE

look like in two years’ time, as you can add and remove
accessories as you go. Start small and add from over 50
accessories based on your needs. TPB comes in one flat • Safe, economic and ergonomic all-in-one
pack and is easy to assemble. Perfect packing table option choice
for cost-conscious users. • Adapts and grows according to needs
• 50+ accessories and add-on products
Carefully selected materials, high-quality finishing, epoxy
available
powdercoated steel parts. Laminate bench top, 25 mm
low-pressure laminate. Stepless height adjustment with • One flat pack contains all the basic
allen-key between 650-900 mm. equipment
• Easy to buy, transport and assemble

ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 77
READ MORE ABOUT Essential range of accessories available for
Treston packing benches
ergonomic TPB packing bench
from our separate brochure.

treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

48 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES TPB

Designing TPB packing station

2 310
• The TPB packing bench comes with a full set of basic mm
accessories. The package includes 2 roll holders, 1
perforated panel, upper steel shelf, divider hoops and
an auxiliary steel shelf. 3
4
• Further customize with additional accessories 5
900
mm

1080–1550 mm
Packing bench TPB
Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
1500 x 900 x 650-900 300 TPB915
6
1800 x 900 x 650-900 300 TPB918

650–900 mm
+ Accessories from page 77
800 mm
Essential range of accessories available for ergonomic 1500/1
TPB packing bench

Packing bench TPB915/TPB918 includes:

Name Description Code Code
TPB915 TPB918
1. Height adjustable Size 310 x 1500/1800 mm. Max load 30 kg. Fixing positions for Treston lighting SS150 SS180
upper steel shelf units under the shelf.
2. Adjustable divider hoops Five adjustable divider hoops (height 400 mm). PDH PDH
3. Height adjustable steel perforated Size of the panel 1419/1719 x 255 mm. For auxiliary steel shelves and PP150 PP180
panel with bin rail stacking bins. Max load 20 kg.
4. Auxiliary steel shelf Size 217 x 298 x 20 mm, for A4 paper and tape dispensers (max 2 pcs per shelf). ASSA4 ASSA4
Max load 3 kg.
5. Upper paper roll holder Height adjustable. Axle diameter 25 mm. Max roll width 1400/1700 mm. PRH ROLL150 PRH ROLL180
Max load 40 kg.
6. Lower paper roll holder Simply hangs on horizontal bars of legs. Depth adjustable. Axle diameter 25 mm. Max PRHL ROLL150 PRHL ROLL180
roll width 1350/1650 mm. Max load 40 kg.

Lower steel shelf LSS

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Lower shelf 1418 x 460 30 LSS150
Lower shelf 1718 x 460 30 LSS180
Low M-divider 460 x 315 LDH
hoops (4 pcs/set)
Hangs on the horizontal bars. Can be equipped with steplessly adjustable
low M-divider hoops.

Side worktop
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Side worktop 400 x 900 35 TP904 ST
Easy to fix to the legs of the bench. Can be fixed on the left or right side of the
bench and brackets placed either above or underneath. Height adjustable
575-900 mm from the floor.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 49

 Workshop benches

‘Workshop’ benches are designed for the most

max
750
KG
5years

demanding use and environments. Mechanical GUARANTEE

workshops, garages and heavy industry are environments

where chemicals, heavy loads, and strenuous use • Worktop designed for very heavy loads,
necessitate robustness. These workbenches are very load capacity up to 750 kg.
durable and withstand the toughest conditions. There is a
wide range of accessories available. • Very stable on uneven surfaces due to
adjustable legs.
The Workshop bench is guaranteed for regular use with • Can be bolted to floor for more stability.
loads up to 750 kg.
• You can build your personal workstation with
our wide range of accessories.

ACCESSORIES ON PAGE 55
Superior range of accessories available for
Workshop workstation

50 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES Workshop

Workshop bench examples

Workshop standard workbench Workshop installation workstation

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code
2 Adjustable leg 836 664-49 2 Fixed leg 836 303-49
1 Steel bench top 1500 x 750 836 721-74 1 Wood top 1500 x 750 836 721-82
1 Spacer bar 1500-2250 836 451-49 1 Drawer unit 55/13-1 550 x 715 x 130 610 07 001
1 Spacer bar 1500-2250 836 451-49

Workshop repair workstation Workshop workstation

Qty Name Size mm Code Qty Name Size mm Code

2 Fixed leg 836 303-49 1 Steel bench top 1500 x 750 836 721-74
1 Steel bench top 1500 x 750 836 721-74 1 Adjustable leg 700-950 836 664-49
3 Upright tube 30 x 60 x 996 860 367-49 1 Fixing frame 1500 860 375-49
2 Perforated panel 718 x 612 861 512-07 3 Upright tube 1359 860 024-49
1 Drawer unit 55/37-1 550 x 715 x 370 611 07 001 1 Light/balancer rail 2 x M750 918 49 006
1 Fixing frame 860 375-49 1 Treston NaturLite LED 1200 1180 TNL1200
2 Steel shelf M750 x 300 836 028-49
2 Suspension rail M750 859 151-49
5 Stacking bin 1525-5
Design your own workstation
! You can design your own workstation using the available
7 Stacking bin 1015-5
components with the 3D configurator at 1 Perforated tool cabinet M750 852 629-07
https://3d.treston.com 1 Drawer unit 55/66 612 07 204

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 51

 WORKBENCHES Workshop

Designing a Workshop workstation

• Select the appropriate bench top: steel, vinyl or wood. 50 750
0, 22
500, 200
1000, 1
• Select a support for both ends of the bench top:
adjustable or fixed leg or a drawer unit. Legs with
castors are also available

750-1000
• Use a spacer bar to stabilise the bench.
• An accessory frame can be used instead of a spacer
bar if upright tubes are specified.
• Equip with accessories starting from page page 55.

733

Workshop Workshop top Workshop top Workshop

steel top with steel edges with plastic edges wooden top
• Steel top 1.5 mm • Vinyl top • Vinyl top • Beech multiplex, treated with
• Epoxy powder coated dark- • Grey vinyl surface • Grey vinyl surface linseed oil
grey surface • Galvanized steel front edge • Grey plastic edging • Pre-drilled holes for
• Grey plastic ends fixing legs and drawer
• Plywood and chipboard core • Plywood and chipboard core units
• Plywood and chipboard core • Threaded bushings for fixing • Threaded bushings for fixing legs • Thickness 40 mm
• Threaded bushings for fixing legs and drawer units and drawer units
legs and drawer units • Thickness 50 mm • Thickness 50 mm
• 3 mm steel top available on
request
• Thickness 50 mm

Workshop bench tops

Bench top Steel top Max Steel top Max Vinyl top with Max Vinyl top with Max Wood top Max
Size W x D mm 1,5 mm load kg 3 mm load kg steel edges load kg plastic edges load kg load kg
1000 x 750 836 720-74 750 852 652-74 750 836 723-79 750 836 729-79 500 836 720-82 600
1500 x 750 836 721-74 750 852 653-74 750 836 724-79 750 836 726-79 500 836 721-82 600
2000 x 750 836 736-74 500 852 654-74 750 836 728-79 500 836 730-79 500 836 736-82 360
2250 x 750 836 722-74 500 852 649-74 750 836 725-79 500 836 727-79 500 836 722-82 360

Workshop legs
Name Height mm* Code
Adjustable H-leg (1 pc) 700-950 836 664-49
Fixed H-leg (1 pc) 800 836 303-49
Adjustable H-leg for castors (1 pc) 730-950 836 029-49
Swivel castor with brake** (1 pc) Ø100 1987
Fixed castor** (1pc) Ø100 1988
* Height without bench top (including 100 mm castors).
** Load capacity: 500 kg for benches 1000 mm and 1500 mm wide, 300 kg for benches
2000 mm and 2250 mm wide. Legs with castors are
also available

52 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 WORKBENCHES Workshop

A drawer unit can serve as a leg

Workshop workbenches can be easily extended by using a drawer frame or a leg as a
common support for two workbenches.

Spacer bar for Workshop bench

Width mm Code
1000-1500 852 694-49
1500-2250 836 451-49
Spacer bar is used to stabilise the bench. It is necessary if the bench consists only of legs and
bench top.

Accessory frame for Workshop bench

Width mm Code
1000 852 693-49
1500 860 375-49
2000 860 725-49
2250 860 376-49
Accessory frame is needed if the bench is equipped with upright tubes. Replaces the spacer
bar. See upright tubes and compatibility on page 55.

Upright tubes and compatibility

Suitable for bench widths (W = Workshop)
1000 1500 2000 2250
+
Accessories from page 55
1 x M750 W W W W There is a wide range of accessories available for
1 x M900 W W W W Workshop bench.
1 x M1000 W
1 x M1500 W W W
1 x M1800 W W
2 x M500 W W W W
2 x M750 W W W
2 x M900 W W
2 x M1000 W
3 x M500 W W W
3 x M750 W
4 x M500 W
The Workshop
bench can be fitted
with a lower shelf
Lower shelves for the Workshop bench for bulky items.
Name Size Max Code
W x D mm load kg
Lower shelf for adustable leg for bench 1000 870 x 648 200 924 49 020
Lower shelf for fixed leg for bench 1000 870 x 648 200 924 49 021
Lower shelf for adjustable leg for bench 1500 1370 x 648 200 924 49 012
Lower shelf for fixed leg for bench 1500 1370 x 648 200 924 49 014
Lower shelf for adjustable leg for bench 2000 1870 x 648 100 924 49 013
Lower shelf for fixed leg for bench 2000 1870 x 648 100 924 49 015
Lower shelf for adjustable leg for bench 2250 2120 x 648 100 924 49 016
Lower shelf for fixed leg for bench 2250 2120 x 648 100 924 49 018
The lower shelves include a backstop.

Structure of the bench top

For us, the bench top is an important part of a bench’s structure. For example, the Workshop bench top is designed
for very heavy loads. Because of the bench top’s structure, the bench is very sturdy, even with the highest loads. The
feet and the drawers are attached to the threaded bushings in the bench tops.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 53

 2. Workbench accessories

54 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 Accessories for Concept, TED, Quick Edge,
TP and Workshop

Our Concept, TED, Quick Edge TP and Workshop benches can be fitted with the same accessories and they are in-
terchangeable. Other bench models' accessories starting from page 72 (WB accessories). Accessories suitable for all our
bench models starting from page 82.
Corner bracket
Upright tubes are the basic element for accessorising our Straight bracket
Horizontal tube
industrial furnishings. Accessories are attached to Concept,
TED, TP and Workshop benches with the aid of upright
tubes or a complete, upright tube module.

The complete upright tube module includes upright tubes,

corner bracket pair and straight bracket pair (if module
Upright tube
includes more than one horizontal tube). For the Concept h=
bench, the upright tubes are attached to the rear case of
the bench. With the TP bench, you also need an accessory l=

frame TPK (page 42). For the TED bench, upright tube pair
with a flange is fitted on worktop with screws.

Upright tubes for Concept, TP and Workshop

Name Size W x D mm Length mm Code
Upright tube 30 x 60 500 860 991-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 800 860 142-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 996 860 367-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 1359 860 024-49
Upright tube 30 x 60 1582 860 025-49
Horizontal tube M500 860 819-49
Horizontal tube M750 847 402-49
Horizontal tube M900 840 104-49
Horizontal tube M1000 854 656-49 The modular (M) size
Horizontal tube M1200 854 655-49 ! The modular (M) size refers to the distance between two
Horizontal tube M1350 850 914-49 upright tubes from the middle of the tube. The modular
Horizontal tube M1500 854 654-49 size is used to find the appropriate accessories.
Horizontal tube M1800 854 657-49
Corner bracket pair 848 336-49
Straight bracket 851 827-49 Upright tube pair with a flange for TED
Size W x D x H mm Code
70 x 100 x 418 TTP400-49
Upright tube modules for Concept and TP 70 x 100 x 793 TTP790-49
Suitable for bench widths Code Code 70 x 100 x 997 TTP990-49
C = Concept, TP = TP bench l =1359 mm l =1582 mm
1000 1200 1500 1800 2000 h =1075 mm h =1300 mm
1 x M750 C C/TP C C C 900 49 001P 900 49 002P Aluminium bracket
1 x M900 C/TP C/TP C C C 901 49 001P 901 49 002P Name Code
2 x M500 C C 902 49 001P 902 49 002P Aluminium bracket 846 554-00
2 x M750 C/TP C C 903 49 001P 903 49 002P
2 x M900 C/TP C 904 49 001P 904 49 002P
3 x M500 C C 905 49 001P 905 49 002P
4 x M500 C 906 49 001P 906 49 002P
h = module's height measured from Concept bench's top surface.
Upright tube modules are available also with 996 mm uprights (h=714 mm).
A separate aluminium bracket can
Item codes: 90x49003P.
be used to attach a single tube to
Load capacity 100 kg / module spacing. any bench.
Upright tube modules include 5 pcs of cable clips for easy cable management.
Upright tube pair with a
flange for TED

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 55

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Light and balancer rail

Apart from the Treston Wave LED ESD and Naturlite LED Wing 500 all luminaires are fitted to light/balancer rails which are
height and depth adjustable. Tool balancer rails and sliding pieces faciliate the use of heavy equipment. A tool balancer is
fixed to the light/balancer rail.

Light and balancer rail (includes one sliding piece)

Modular size Width of the front Max load kg Code
profile mm
2 x M500 1000 15 918 49 001P
2 x M500/1500 1500 15 918 49 002P
4 x M500 2000 15 918 49 003P
M750 750 15 918 49 004P
M750/900 900 15 918 49 013P
M750/1500 1500 15 918 49 005P
2 x M750 1500 15 918 49 006P
3 x M750 2250 15 918 49 012P
M900 900 15 918 49 007P
2 x M900 1800 15 918 49 008P
M900/1500 1500 15 918 49 009P
M1200 1200 15 918 49 010P
M1350 1350 15 918 49 011P
With extension benches you also need a center bracket, code 860 074-49
+
Lighting solutions from page 88.

    



Width of th
e front p
900/1500 rofile
mm
Height 329 mm

   

   

  


370

 





   

 
 


670

Modular size
M750
Modular size 2 x M750

Tool balancers and other supplies

Name Tool weight kg Code
Tool balancer 2DU 0,5 - 1 939 502-00
Tool balancer 4DU 1-2 939 503-00
Sliding piece with a snap hook 890 557-51

Tool balancer Sliding piece with a snap hook

56 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Power rails
Power rails come with brackets for fixing to Treston workstations.
Rails can be fixed vertically on upright or aluminum profile,
horizontally on aluminum profile or on M750 and M900 modules
between uprights. With a new bracket set rails can also be fixed
straight to table top or perforated panel. Power rail can be
mounted on four different angles on brackets. Length of the rail TPR3-001
can limit the mounting possibilities.

Power rails
Description Length Code

3 sockets + 2 x USB 331 TPR3-001

6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 468 TPR4-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 468 TPR4-003 TPR4-001
4 sockets + switch + fault current protection 468 TPR4-004
6 sockets + switch 468 TPR4-005
5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-001
5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 683 TPR7-003
4 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-008
10 sockets + switch 683 TPR7-038
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 836 TPR9-003 TPR7-001
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-010
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-001
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-010
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1700 TPR17-001
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 1700 TPR17-010

TPR9-001

TPR14-001

+
Further info and images on power rails on page 84.

Distributor for compressed air

Name In Out Fixing Code
Distributor for compressed air 1 2 vert. 859 861-00
All connections are 3/8"
Can be fitted to all Treston benches.

Distributor for compressed air

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 57

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Shelves
Tiltable top shelf TTS
Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
M500 467 x 300 80 TTSM5003-49
M500 467 x 400 80 TTSM5004-49
M750 717 x 300 80 TTSM7503-49
M750 717 x 400 80 TTSM7504-49
M900 870 x 300 80 TTSM9003-49
M900 870 x 400 80 TTSM9004-49
M1000 967 x 300 80 TTSM10003-49 Tiltable top shelf M500, M750, M900, M1000,
M1000 967 x 400 80 TTSM10004-49 M1200, M1350, M1500, M1800, M2000
M1200 1167 x 300 80 TTSM12003-49
M1200 1167 x 400 80 TTSM12004-49
M1350 1320 x 300 80 TTSM13503-49
M1350 1320 x 400 80 TTSM13504-49
M1500 1467 x 300 80 TTSM15003-49
M1500 1467 x 400 80 TTSM15004-49
M1800 1773 x 300 80 TTSM18003-49
M1800 1773 x 400 80 TTSM18004-49
M2000 1973 x 300 80 TTSM20003-49 Cable cover, TTS-shelf
M2000 1973 x 400 80 TTSM20004-49
Max. tilt 20 degrees (depth 300 mm) or 12,5 degrees (depth 400 mm). Front lip
height 30 mm. Can also be installed at the back of the shelf.

Cable cover, for TTS-shelf

Module Size D x H mm Code
M750 612 x 125 x 19 CCM750-49
M900 815 x 125 x 19 CCM900-49
M1500 1362 x 125 x 19 CCM1500-49
Accessory box for under TTS-shelf
M1800, M2000 1666 x 125 x 19 CCM1800-49

Accessory box for under TTS-shelf

Suitable for Size D x H mm Code
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 300 mm 220 x 300 ABTTS3-41
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 300 mm 220 x 300 ABTTS3-49
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 400 mm 220 x 370 ABTTS4-41
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 400 mm 220 x 370 ABTTS4-49
Includes a blue (-41) or a black ESD (-49) 3020 or 4020 bin.

Steel shelf
Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code Steel shelf M500, M750, M900, M1000, M1350,
M500 490 x 300 50 860 804-49 M1500
M500 490 x 400 50 860 805-49
M750 740 x 300 50 836 028-49
M750 740 x 400 50 852 770-49
M900 890 x 300 50 852 283-49
M900 890 x 400 50 852 769-49
Due to the dual-purpose shelf brackets,
M1000 990 x 300 50 890 631-49 ! the steel shelf can be used either as tilted
M1000 990 x 400 50 890 632-49
20° or in a horizontal position. The shelf has
M1350 1340 x 300 50 860 787-49 an integrated edge, which can used either
M1350 1340 x 400 50 860 788-49 in the front or back of the shelf, depending
M1500 1490 x 300 50 890 756-49 of the use of the shelf.
M1500 1490 x 400 50 890 757-49

58 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Divider hoops set (4 pcs)

Suitable for Size D x H mm Code
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 300 mm 300 x 400 PDH300-49
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 400 mm 400 x 400 PDH400-49

Divider pair
Suitable for Size D x H mm Code
Steel shelf depth 300 mm 285 x 190 010 004-49 Divider hoops set
Steel shelf depth 400 mm 385 x 190 010 005-49
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 300 mm 285 x 190 861 116-49
Tiltable top shelf TTS depth 400 mm 385 x 190 861 118-49

Adjustable shelf
Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
M500 470 x 505 100 920 49 001P
M500 470 x 650 100 920 49 002P Divider pair
M750 720 x 505 100 920 49 005P
M750 720 x 650 100 920 49 006P
M900 870 x 505 100 920 49 009P
M900 870 x 650 100 920 49 010P
M1350 1320 x 505 100 920 49 013P
M1350 1320 x 650 100 920 49 014P
Also available as non ESD-versions (code 41 instead of 49).

Adjustable shelf, tilting 0-25°

Adjustable shelf, stepless depth adjustment
Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
M500 470 x 505 50 920 49 003P
M500 470 x 650 50 920 49 004P
M750 720 x 505 50 920 49 007P
M750 720 x 650 50 920 49 008P
M900 870 x 505 50 920 49 011P
M900 870 x 650 50 920 49 012P
Also available as non ESD-versions (code 41 instead of 49). Steplessly adjustable shelf, tilting 0-25°

+
Additional adjustable shelves on page 113.

Extendable shelf Extendable shelf, tilting 0-25°

Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
M750 720 x 390 30 925 49 002P
M900 870 x 390 30 925 49 003P

Document shelf
Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
M500 470 x 265 5 860 806-49
Document shelf, tilting 10 - 75°
M750 720 x 265 5 860 115-49
M900 870 x 265 5 860 399-49

Flow-through shelf
Module Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
M750 718 x 830 150 890 710-49
A flow-through shelf can fit two 400 mm deep bins in depth direction.
Flow-through shelf
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 59
 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Upright accessories
Adjustable auxiliary shelf
Name Size Tilting Max Code Code ESD
W x D mm load kg
Adjustable auxiliary shelf 560 x 340 0-25° 15 927 41 001P 927 49 001P
Adjustable auxiliary shelf
Adjustable auxiliary shelf 605 x 405 0-25° 15 927 41 002P 927 49 002P

IT shelves and trays

Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Laptop / printer shelf 365 x 365 25 930 49 001P
Keyboard tray for laptop shelf 480 x 270 5 860 904-49
Laptop/printer shelf with arm
Keyboard and mouse tray for laptop shelf 620 x 270 5 860 903-49
Keyboard tray (attached to the bench top)* 680 x 375 x 106 (outer) 10 925 49 001P
620 x 305 x 90 (inner)
*Suitable also for WB, TP, TPH and TPB benches.

Holder for Thin Client PC Keyboard tray (attached to the bench

Name Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code top)
Holder for Thin Client PC 250 x 45-65 x 145 5 TCH
Fixed to keyboard tray 860941-49 or 860942-49.

LCD monitor holder for perforated panel

Name Max load kg Code
LCD monitor holder for perforated panel 10 890 715-49 Holder for Thin Client PC
Suitable for VESA 75/100

Display bracket for light duty for TED desk

Name Suitable for Max load kg Code
Display bracket for light duty for TED desk TED 7 TDB-49
Suitable for VESA 75/100
LCD monitor holder for perforated panel

LCD holder with double arm

Name Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code
LCD holder with double arm* 15 930 49 002P
Keyboard tray for LCD holder 480 x 260 5 860 941-49
Keyboard and mouse tray for LCD holder 620 x 260 5 860 942-49
Fixed to keyboard tray 860941-49 or 860942-49.
* Suitable for VESA 75/100 Display bracket for light duty

Maximum distance between the LCD LCD-holder & keyboard tray LCD holder with double arm
holder and keyboard tray

60 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Equipment tray
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Equipment tray 250 x 250 x 90 10 928 49 001P
Equipment tray 500 x 250 x 125 15 928 49 002P
Equipment tray * 500 x 250 x 125 30 928 49 003P
*Comes with heavy arm.

Equipment tray

Bin shelf
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Bin shelf 560 x 175 x 125 15 928 49 005P
Bin shelf 600 x 220 x 125 15 928 49 006P
Stand for picking bins** 560 x 165 x 355 860 113-49
Bin shelf
*Space for 15 picking bins 30-1L-4ESD

Stand for stacking bins

Document holders
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Document holder A4 290 x 330 5 928 49 008P
Document holder A3 418 x 330 5 928 49 009P

Document holder

Tool panel
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Tool panel 267 x 305 5 928 49 010P

Tool panel

Bin rails with arms

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Curved bin rail with arm 770 x 54 15 929 49 002P
Extension for curved bin rail with arm 770 x 54 860 911-49

Curved bin rail with arm

Extension for curved bin rail with arm

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 61

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Rotating tool frame

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Rotating tool panel frame, height-adjustable arm 513 x 320 15 860 864-49P
Rotating tool panel frame, double arm 513 x 320 15 880 865-49P

Rotating tool panel frame with double

arm
Rotating tool panel frame
The rotating tool panel frame can be equipped with perforated panels
and tool troughs. The rotating tool frame is compatible with all M500
accessories, such as the tool trough and the bin rails.

Plastic bins, hooks and tools in pictures are not included.

Accessories for rotating tool frame

Rotating tool panel frame with M500
Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
perforated panel, M500 bin rails and 8
Perforated panel 470 x 300 860 951-49 plastic ESD bins
Tool trough M500 470 x 150 860 952-49
Bin rail M500 492 x 90 15* 859 150-49
Light bin rail M500 492 x 54 10 860 953-49
Aluminium bin rail M500 for rotating tool panel 486 x 55 x 75 15 BP500C
Auxiliary steel shelf 217 x 298 x 20 3 ASSA4
Auxiliary steel shelf 159 x 254 x 50 2 ASSA5
*Actual bin rail max load 40 kg but with arm 15 kg.

Rotating tool panel frame with M500

Replacement arms (spare parts) perforated panel, aluminium bin rail
M500 and auxiliary steel shelf
Name Length mm Max load kg Code
Double arm, 40 mm 200+200 10 880 020-49
Double arm, 60 mm 200+200 15 880 010-49
Heavy arm, 60 mm 287+221 30 860 993-49
Height-adjustable arm with gas spring, 60 mm 375 15 860 985-49
(height adjustment range 165 mm)
Height-adjustable profile 55 x 80 x 590 15 860 997-49
LCD screen holder for 60 mm double, heavy or height adjustable arms: 860940-49.

Double arm

Height-adjustable profile

When a position changes, the height must be adjusted

Frequent changes in the working position, such as changing from a sitting
position to a standing position, require height-adjustable arm (860 985-49).
The height-adjustable profile (860 997-49) can be attached to any rack with
arm (such as the PC rack) that is pulled down and lifted back up according to
the working position. The adjustment range is 450 mm.
Heavy arm

Arm adapters for Concept/TP/TED accessories with arms (for example 93049002P)
Profile type Workbench / trolley model 40 mm arm 60 mm arm
C-profiles TPH, TPB - E824 081-49
AL2X aluminum profiles WB 890 524-49 890 525-49
Aluminum profiles WTR E821 573-49 E821 572-49
Height-adjustable arm

62 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Auxiliary top, fixed brackets

Name Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D mm load kg
Auxiliary top left 400 x 500 40 926 41 001P 926 49 001P
Auxiliary top right 400 x 500 40 926 41 002P 926 49 002P
Auxiliary top

Bottle holder
Name Code
Bottle holder (Ø 100) for upright tube 859 063-49

Bottle holder
Roll holder for upright tube
Name Code
Roll holder for upright tube (roll ø height 150 mm, width 320 mm) 860 841-49

Roll holder
Adapter set AS
Name Suitable for Code
Adapter set for Concept/TED/TP uprights * MH / MA / MA2 AS2
Adapter for Concept/TED/TP uprights MA4 AS4
The above adapter set/adapters are needed for fixing MH/MA/MA2/MA4 to the uprights.
* AS2 is also suitable for TPH/TPB C-profiles.

Adapter set AS2 Adapter AS4

LCD bracket MH
Name Max load kg Suitable for Code
LCD bracket MH 15 Upright profiles + AS2 MH
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard used flat-screen mount 75 x 75 and 100
x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens.

LCD swivel arm MA LCD bracket MH

Name Max load kg Suitable for Code
LCD swivel arm MA 10 Upright profiles + AS2 MA
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard flat-screen mount 75 x 75 and 100 x 100
for the mounting of all normal flat-screens. The arm is double articulated, turns through a radius of 180°
and will extend between 95-425 mm from the upright.

LCD swivel arm MA2 LCD swivel arm MA

Name Max load kg Suitable for Code
LCD swivel arm MA2 15 Upright profiles + AS2 MA2
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard, widely used flat-screen mount 75 x 75 and
100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens. The arm is double articulated, turns through a radius
of 180° and will extend between 95-425 mm from the upright.

LCD swivel arm MA2

LCD screen holder with height adjustable arm MA4
Name Max load kg Suitable for Code
LCD screen holder MA4 2-7 Upright profiles + AS4 MA4
Highly ergonomic and easily height adjustable monitor arm with a gas spring. Easy mounting of the
monitor with a quick-release mechanism, standard flat screen mount 75 x 75 mm and 100 x100 mm for
LCD screens. Cable management by cable clips. The double arm turns through a radius of 180 and will
extend between 80–500 mm from the upright.

LCD screen holder MA4

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 63

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Packing accessories
Shelf for packing material SPM
Name Size Max Suitable Code
W x D x H mm load kg for
Shelf for packing material 467 x 600 x 32 60 M500 SPM500-49
Shelf for packing material 717 x 600 x 32 60 M750 SPM750-49
Shelf for packing material 870 x 600 x 32 60 M900 SPM900-49
Shelf for packing material 1167 x 600 x 32 60 M1200 SPM1200-49 Shelf for packing material and brackets for
Shelf for packing material 1317 x 600 x 32 60 M1350 SPM1350-49 Concept accessory bar
Shelf for packing material 1467 x 600 x 32 60 M1500 SPM1500-49
Shelf for packing material 1773 x 600 x 32 60 M1800 SPM1800-49
Brackets for Concept SPM-shelves SPMH-49
accessory bar
Adjustable fastening set 90 x 350 x 355 (free space SPM-shelves SPMAF-49
under worktop 285-465 on lower shelf)
Brackets for upright tube SPM-shelves SPMBS-49
Divider hoops set (4 pcs) 8 x 400 x 280 SPM-shelves PDH600-49
The shelf does not include fastening parts.
Shelf for packing material, adjustable faste-
SPM shelves aren't suitable for TED electric desk. Lower shelves for TED on page 35.
ning set under worktop and divider hoops

Suitability of lower shelves to 750 and 900 mm deep benches:

! Concept 2000/1800 -> SPM1500 or smaller
Concept 1500 -> SPM1200 or smaller
Concept 1200 -> SPM900 or smaller
Concept 1000 -> SPM500.
Shelf for packing material and brackets for
upright tube

Roll holders
Name Max roll Max Suitable Code
length mm load kg for
Roll holder set 635 40 M750 890 547-49P
Roll holder set 785 40 M900 890 548-49P
Roll holder set 1400 40 M1500 859 041-49P
Roll holder set
Roll holder set 1700 40 M1800 859 042-49P
Roll holder set under worktop 1500 1200 40 M1500 859 044-49P
Roll holder set under worktop 1800 1500 40 M1800 859 045-49P
Paper roll dividers (2 pcs) Ø 170 mm RD25

Roll holder set under worktop

+
Paper roll holders and cutters on page 86.

Paper roll divider

64 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Pull-out steel shelf for printer

Name Size Max Suitable Code
W x D x H mm load kg for
Pull-out steel shelf for printer 500 x 510 x 515 35 Concept ,TPB PSP50
Suitable for 750 and 900 deep Concept benches.

Pull-out steel shelf for printer

Printer platform slideable

Name Size Max Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Printer platform slideable 315 x 530 30 Concept, TED 859 060-49

Printer platform slideable

Fixed tape dispenser

Name Suitable for Code
Fixed tape dispenser Concept, TPB, TED, Quick Edge FTD50
Includes screws to fix the dispenser to ASSA4 (see page 58). Max roll Ø 120 mm and width
50 mm.

Fixed tape dispenser

Basic label dispenser

Name Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
Basic label dispenser 214 x 128 x 120 Concept, TPB, TED, Quick Edge BLD20
Can be fixed with screws. Max roll Ø 220 mm and width 210 mm.

Basic label dispenser

Recycling material bin

Name Size Max Suitable Code
W x D x H mm load kg for
Pull-out recycling material bin 286 x 570 x 650 15 Concept, TPB PRMB3
Recycling material bin 280 x 530 x 585 15 TED PRMB

Recycling material Recycling material

bin PRMB3 bin PRMB

Tool tray PTH

Name Size W x D mm Suitable for Code
Tool tray PTH 1000 x 60 Concept motor benches, TED PTH100

Tool tray PTH

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 65

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Stacking bins and shelf bins

Another way of ensuring an ergonomic working position and
saving space is to use bin rails. The higher the rails are, the Extension bracket pair

further they are from the workstation. To ensure an ergonomic

working position, use the extension bracket pair on the higher
rails. The bin rails are available in six standard module sizes.

Name Suitable for Size Max Code

module W x D mm load kg
Bin rail M500 492 x 100 50 859 150-49
Light bin rail M500 492 x 54 10 860 953-49
Bin rail M750 742 x 100 50 859 151-49
Light bin rail M750 742 x 54 10 860 955-49 Bin rail with stacking bins.
Bin rail M900 895 x 100 50 859 152-49
Light bin rail M900 895 x 54 10 860 956-49
Bin rail M1000 967 x 100 50 859 156-49
Bin rail M1200 1167 x 100 50 859 157-49
Bin rail M1350 1343 x 100 50 859 153-49
Bin rail M1500 1493 x 100 50 859 154-49
Bin rail M1800 1799 x 100 50 859 155-49
Extension bracket pair 60 50 860 919-49 Light bin rail with stacking bins.
Aluminium bin rail M500 486 x 55 x 75 40 BP500C
Aluminium bin rail M750 736 x 55 x 75 40 BP750C
Aluminium bin rail M900 889 x 55 x 75 40 BP900C
Aluminium bin rail M1350 1320 x 55 x 75 40 BP1350C
Aluminium bin rail M1500 1486 x 55 x 75 40 BP1500C
Aluminium bin rail M1800 1792 x 55 x 75 40 BP1800C
Auxiliary steel shelf 217 x 298 x 20 3 ASSA4
Auxiliary steel shelf 159 x 254 x 50 2 ASSA5
Aluminium bin rail BP and ASSA4
Light bin rail is recommended only for the small stacking bins.

6 7
2 3 4
5
1

Stacking bins Labels and cross dividers

No. Capacity Outer dims Inner dims Pack Code.* Code.* Code.* Labels + Pack min. Cross Pack
l W x D x H mm W x D x H mm pcs blue red ESD black shields order divider pcs
1. 0,6 105 x 165 x 75 90 x 105 x 65 60 1015-6 1015-5 1015-4 ESD E10 60
2. 2,7 149 x 250 x 130 125 x 185 x 115 30 1525-6 1525-5 1525-4 ESD E15 30 V-14 30
3. 5,0 186 x 300 x 156 155 x 230 x 140 24 1930-6 1930-5 1930-4 ESD E20 24 V-19 24
4. 7,2 186 x 400 x 156 155 x 330 x 140 24 1940-6 1940-5 1940-4 ESD E20 24 V-19 24
5. 1,1 99 x 160 x 70 85 x 100 x 62 60 30-1L-6 30-1L-4 ESD
6. 2,2 198 x 160 x 70 175 x 100 x 62 30 30-2L-6 30-2L-4 ESD
7. 2,2 198 x 160 x 70 175 x 100 x 62 30 30-23L-6 30-23L-4 ESD
(2 fixed length dividers)
*) Order number/one item. All bins are also available in grey colour, colour code -3

Fixing stacking bins on the bin rail

Bin rail M500 M750 M900 M1350 M1500 M1800 Curved bin rail
1015 4 7 8 12 14 17
1525 3 5 6 9 10 12
1930 & 1940 2 4 4 7 8 9
30-1L 5 7 9 13 15 17 5
30-2L & 30-23L 2 3 4 7 7 9

66 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

1 2 3 4 5

Shelf bins Cross dividers

No. Capacity Outer dims Inner dims Pack Code* Code.* Code.* Code* Number/bin
l W x D x H mm W x D x H mm pcs blue red ESD black
1. 1,9 92 x 400 x 82 75 x 357 x 70 30 4010-6 4010-5 4010-4 ESD D-10 6
2. 2,4 92 x 500 x 82 75 x 457 x 70 30 5010-6 5010-5 5010-4 ESD D-10 8
3. 4,2 186 x 400 x 82 167 x 357 x 70 15 4020-6 4020-5 4020-4 ESD D-20 6
4. 5,3 186 x 500 x 82 167 x 457 x 70 15 5020-6 5020-5 5020-4 ESD D-20 8
5. 6,5 186 x 600 x 82 167 x 557 x 70 15 6020-6 6020-5 6020-4 ESD D-20 10
*) Order number/one items. All bins are also available in grey colour, colour code -3
Sustainable wood-based bioplastic shelf bins on page 191.

Other supplies
Name Description Size W x D x Hmm Code
Stacking bin set Four bins made of blue polypropylene (PP). 2 pcs 230 x 155 x 140 SBS4
2 pcs 185 x 125 x 115
Tool holder box With two blue plastic bins type 3020. 400 x 300 x 150 PPH TXL

Stacking bin set

+
Entire bin selection on page 189.

Perforated panels Tool holder box

Name Module Size W x H mm Code

Perforated back panel M500 468 x 389 861 501-49
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 194 861 510-07
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 389 861 511-49
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 612 861 512-07/-49
Perforated back panel, insulated M750 718 x 612 861 701-07/-49
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 1003 861 514-07/-49
Perforated back panel M900 871 x 389 861 516-49
Perforated back panel M900 871 x 612 861 517-07/49
Perforated back panel M900 871 x 1003 861 519-07/49
Perforated back panel M1000 968 x 389 861 532-49
Perforated back panel M1000 968 x 612 861 538-07/49
Perforated back panel M1000 968 x 1003 861 535-07 +
Perforated back panel M1200 1168 x 389 861 533-49 Panel hooks from page 176.
Perforated back panel M1350 1318 x 389 861 521-49
Perforated back panel M1500 1474 x 389 861 526-49
Perforated back panel M1800 1774 x 389 861 531-49
Fastened to the upright tubes (see page 51).

Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
159 x 243 x 56 Perforated panel ASSA5PP
Auxiliary steel shelf for A5 documents, tape dispenser or handheld scanner. Attached to
the perforated panel. Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 67

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Small storage solutions

Perforated tool cabinet
Name Module Size Max Code
size W x D x H mm load kg
Perforated tool cabinet, blue M500 470 x 250 x 600 20 854 039-07
Perforated tool cabinet, blue M750 720 x 255 x 900 60 852 629-07
Shelf for M750 perforated tool 715 x 175 x 15 10 836 273-49
cabinet

Perforated tool cabinet Perforated tool cabinet

M500 M750

Sliding door cabinet

Name Module Size Max Code
size W x D x H mm load kg
Sliding door cabinet M750 720 x 370 x 400 40 860 970-49

Sliding door cabinet

File cabinet
Name Module Size Max Code
size W x D x H mm load kg
File cabinet with two shelves M750 720 x 330 x 900 60 860 980-49

File cabinet

Personal safety equipment cabinet

Name Module Size Max Code
size W x D x H mm load kg
Personal safety equipment M750 720 x 330 x 900 60 860 987-07
cabinet

Personal safety equipment cabinet

PC/folder box
Name Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code
PC/folder box, fitted to the 130 x 290 x 330 5 860 983-49
upright tubes

PC/folder box

68 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

CPU cabinets and holders

1. CPU/printer holder, bar clamp
Size Max Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm load kg
>150 x 500 x 85 20 Concept with accessory bar 860 551-49

2. CPU holder
Size Max Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm load kg
180-225 x 450 x 50 20 Concept (allen key and hand crank) 860 552-49

2 3
3. CPU holder
Size Max Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm load kg
180-225 x 450 x 50 20 Concept motor 860 740-49

4. CPU holder
Size Max Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm load kg 4
180-225 x 450 x 50 20 TP upright frame 860 553-49

5. CPU holder
Size Max Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm load kg
180-225 x 450 x 50 20 TP/TPH benches 854 440-49
5

6. PC stand CPU
Width Height Suitable for Code
130-240 mm 39-500 mm TED, TP/TPH, Concept (depth CPU
340-460 mm 180-285 mm 750/900 mm) benches

An adjustable holder for either vertical or horizontal CPU, to mount underneath the table worktop.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 69

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Cable management
Cable ducts
Name Size W x H mm Suitable for module Code
Cable duct 467 x 360 M500 860 808-49
Cable duct 717 x 360 M750 860 044-49
Cable duct 870 x 360 M900 860 045-49
Suitable only for Concept bench. Fitted to upright tube.
Cable ducts hide the untidy cables from other equipment. This makes it easy to
keep the back of the workstation and its surroundings tidy.
Hide wires and cables with a cable duct.

Horizontal cable troughs

Name Size Suitable Code
W x D x H mm for module
Horizontal cable trough 737 x 97 x 45 M750 854 553-49
Horizontal cable trough 890 x 97 x 45 M900 854 554-49
Horizontal cable trough 1187 x 97 x 45 M1200 854 555-49
Horizontal cable trough 1337 x 97 x 45 M1350 890 551-49
Horizontal cable trough 1487 x 97 x 45 M1500 854 556-49
Horizontal cable trough 1793 x 97 x 45 M1800 854 557-49
Horizontal troughs effectively conceal the cables, without preventing Fitted to upright tubes, the horizontal cable
maintenance access. trough enables cables to be hidden at the top of
the workstation.

Vertical cable trough

Name Size Code
W x D x H mm
Vertical cable trough 52 x 62 x 1360 861 130-49
The vertical cable trough is fitted on the side of the upright tube.

Vertical cable trough

Treston Cable Tidy

Name Size Suitability Code
W x D x H mm
Treston Cable Tidy 800 x 62 x 100 TED TCT-49
Treston cable tidy hides the cables below the worktop.

Treston Cable Tidy for TED

70 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Concept, TED, Quick Edge, TP and Workshop

Footrests
Footrest, floor
Size W x D mm Height Tilting Suitable for Code ESD
550 x 350 100 5-30° All benches 860 947-49

Footrest, floor, height adjustable Footrest, floor

Size W x D mm Height Tilting Suitable for Code ESD
550 x 350 90-280 5-30° All benches 860 137-49

Footrest, floor, with gas action

Size W x D mm Height Tilting Suitable for Code ESD
550 x 350 90-260 5-30° All benches 860 224-49
Footrest, floor, height adjustable

Footrest JT2
Size W x D mm Height Suitable for Code Code ESD
500 x 370 100 All benches JT2 JT2 ESD
The feature of this foot rest is the fluted exercise roller which revitalises the feet while
working. The surface is corrugated to prevent slipping. Colour of JT2 is grey and JT2
ESD is black. Material polystyrene.
Footrest, floor, with gas action

Footrest, bar
Size W x D mm Height Tilting Suitable for Code ESD
550 x 350 90-280 5-30° Concept 860 136-49

Footrest JT2
Footrest, bar, with gas action
Size W x D mm Height Tilting Suitable for Code ESD
550 x 350 90-260 5-30° Concept 860 196-49

Accessory bars
Name Bench frame Depth Code
width mm adjustment mm Footrest, bar
Accessory bar Concept 1000 - 860 084-49
Accessory bar Concept 1200 - 860 085-49
Accessory bar Concept 1500 150 860 088-49
Accessory bar Concept 1500 - 860 086-49
Accessory bar Concept 1800 150 860 089-49
Accessory bar Concept 1800 - 860 083-49
Accessory bar Concept 2000 150 860 090-49
The accessory bar can be used to fix a footrest or a CPU/printer holder. The accessory
bar is included with the hand crank and motor adjustable Concept benches. Footrest, bar, with gas action

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 71

 Accessories for WB

Upright profiles AL2X

Size W x H mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
1063 x 900 WB811 AL2X110 W AL2X110 W
1489 x 900 WB815 AL2X150 W AL2X150 W
1789 x 900 WB818 AL2X180 W AL2X180 W
Needed for mounting accessories to WB benches. Includes 2 vertical and 1
horizontal profile. With 3 cable clips (CC8). Load capacity 100 kg/AL2X.

Accessory frame AKK

Size W x D mm Suitable for Code Code ESD Upright profiles AL2X
730 x 540 AL2X150 W AKK70 AKK70
AL2X180 W
690 x 500 + AL2X150 W AKK150 AKK150
690 x 500
690 x 500 + AL2X180 W AKK180 AKK180
990 x 500
The accessory frame divides the space between the upright profiles into 2
modules. AKK frame includes 1 vertical and 1 horizontal profile. Useable
height 500 mm.

Accessory frame AKK

Shelf ALH
Size W x D mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
1073 x 310 AL2X110 W, combination ALH110 ALH110 ESD
AL2X180 W + AKK180
1500 x 310 AL2X150 W ALH150 ALH150 ESD
1800 x 310 AL2X180 W ALH180 ALH180 ESD
Height adjustable shelf. 25 mm laminated particle board. Load capacity 50
kg. Mount on upright profiles.

Shelf ALH

Divider hoops PDH

Height mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
400 ALH PDH PDH
Used in combination with shelf ALH. Comes in sets of 5.

Divider hoops PDH

Lower shelf AT
Size Max Suitable Code Code ESD
W x D mm load kg for
828 x 400 50 WB811 AT110 WB AT110 WB ESD
1255 x 400 50 WB815 AT150 WB AT150 WB ESD
1555 x 400 50 WB818 AT180 WB AT180 WB ESD
Height adjustable lower shelf, 25 mm laminated particle board. Mount
between the legs.
Lower shelf AT

72 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES WB

Backstop LIST
Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code ESD
1400 x 52 x 27 ALH150, ALH 150 ESD, LIST150
AT150 WB, AT150 WB ESD
1700 x 52 x 27 ALH180, ALH180 ESD, LIST180
AT180 WB, AT180 WB ESD
Prevents items from falling off the shelf. Can be fixed on the lower shelf AT or
on the shelf ALH. Backstop LIST

Perforated panel ARL

Size W x H mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
668 x 500 AKK70, AKK150 ARL70 ARL70
968 x 500 AKK180, AL2X110W ARL100 ARL100
Mount on accessory frame AKK. The size of the perforation is 9 x 9 mm, center
to center 38 mm.

Perforated panel ARL

Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
159 x 243 x 56 Perforated panel ARL ASSA5PP
Auxiliary steel shelf for A5 documents, tape dispenser or handheld scanner.
Attached to the perforated panel.

Adjustable shelf ASH Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel

Size W x D mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
660 x 400 AKK70, AKK150, ASH70 ASH70 ESD
AKK180
960 x 400 AKK180, AL2X110W ASH100 ASH100 ESD
Continuous adjustment for depth, height and angle. Shelf of 25 mm laminated
particle board. Lipped front edge. Load capacity 35 kg static load. Mount on
accessory frame AKK.

Adjustable shelf ASH

Bin profile BP
Length mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
685 AKK 70, AKK150, BP70 BP70 ESD
AKK180
985 AKK180, AL2X110W BP100 BP100 ESD
Aluminium profile for stacking and picking bins. Mount on accessory frame
AKK.

Bin profile BP

Auxiliary steel shelf ASSA

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
217 x 298 x 20 BP ASSA4
159 x 254 x 50 BP ASSA5
Shelf for A4/A5 paper and tape dispensers (max 2 pcs per shelf). Mounted
on bin profile. Max load 3 kg.

Auxiliary steel shelf ASSA4

Swivel arm with tray AKV

Size W x D mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
460 x 210 (tray) AL2X upright profiles AKV400 AKV400 ESD

Lockable, angle adjustable steel tray with swivel radius of 360°. Length of
swivel arm 590 mm. Max. load 15 kg.

Swivel arm with tray AKV

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 73

 ACCESSORIES WB

Component rack EPL

Size Suitable Shelves Code ESD
W x D x H mm for number
455 x 200 x 290 AKV 3 EPL12 ESD
Rack with three fixed shelves. Semiconductive epoxy powder coated steel in
light grey (RAL 7035). Bins ordered separately, page 50. Component rack
holds: 12 stacking bins 1015-4ESD or 12 picking bins 30-1L-4ESD or 6
picking bins 30-2L-4ESD or 6 picking bins 30-23L-4ESD.

Component rack EPL

Document stand WDA

Size W x H mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
440 x 300 AL2X upright profiles WDA WDA ESD
Document stand A3 with swivel arm. Epoxy powder coated steel: light grey.
Arm length 220 mm. Tilt 75°.

Document stand WDA

Bottle holder CH
Size W x D x H mm Ø mm Suitable for Code
110 x 105 x 120 80 AL2X upright profiles CH
Practical holder for bottle or cup. Made of black polypropylene.

Bottle holder CH

Recycling material bin PRMB

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
282 x 590 x 600 WB, TP, TPH, TPB and TED PRMB
The 60 ltr bin with steel brackets has a maximum load of 15 kg and can be
positioned on either side of the bench.
282 x 590 x 650 WB, Concept, TP, TPH and TPB PRMB3
This pull-out model with steel rails is fixed under the worktop. Bin 60 ltr. Max
load 15 kg.
Recycling material bin Recycling material bin
PRMB PRMB3

Tool holder box PPH

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
400 x 300 x 140 WB, TP, TPH, Concept, TPB, TED PPH TXL
PPH TXL with two blue plastic bins type 3020.

Tool holder box PPH

Tool tray PTH

Size W x D mm Suitable for Code
1000 x 60 WB and TED benches, Concept PTH100
motor benches.
The tool tray guarantees a clean working space, while tools are close to
hand.

Tool tray PTH

74 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES WB

Support bracket HSB

Length mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
1073 AL2X110 W HSB110 HSB110
1500 AL2X150 W HSB150 HSB150
1800 AL2X180 W HSB180 HSB180
Support bracket of steel for suspending power tools and lighting units. Mount
on upright profiles.
Support bracket HSB

Cable tidy WBCT

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
948 x 64 x 204 WB811 WBCT110 WBCT110
1375 x 64 x 204 WB815 WBCT150 WBCT150
1675 x 64 x 204 WB818 WBCT180 WBCT180
Mount on leg frame. We recommend using the cable tidy WBCT with WB
Allen-key adjustable benches. The cable tidy is standard equipment on WB C
and WB EL models.
Cable tidy WBCT

Cable clip set CC

Set Suitable for Code Code ESD
5 pieces AL2X upright profiles CC8 CC8
The cable clip set will hold cables etc. securely and neatly in place along the
bench frame. The clips locate in the 8 mm profile slot.

Cable clip set CC

PC stand CPU
Width Height Suitable for Code
130- 395- WB, TP/TPH, Concept (depth CPU
240 mm 500 mm 750/900 mm) benches, TED
340- 180- SAP, WTR and Concept trolleys
460 mm 285 mm
An adjustable holder for either vertical or horizontal CPU, to mount underneath
the table worktop.

PC stand CPU
Power rails
Description Length Code
3 sockets + 2 x USB 331 TPR3-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 468 TPR4-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 468 TPR4-003
4 sockets + switch + fault current protection 468 TPR4-004
6 sockets + switch 468 TPR4-005
5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-001
5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 683 TPR7-003
Power rails
4 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 683 TPR7-008
2 x USB
10 sockets + switch 683 TPR7-038
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 836 TPR9-003
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 836 TPR9-010
2 x USB
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-001
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 1400 TPR14-010
2 x USB
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1700 TPR17-001
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 1700 TPR17-010
2 x USB
More information and images on power rails on page 84.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 75

 ACCESSORIES WB

Keyboard shelf WKA

Size W x D mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
500 x 220 (shelf) AL2X upright WKA WKA ESD
profiles
Keyboard shelf with swivel arm. Epoxy powder coated steel. Load capacity
15 kg. Arm length 220 mm.

Keyboard shelf WKA

LCD bracket MH
Max load kg Suitable for Code
15 AL2X upright profiles MH
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard used flat-screen
mount 75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens.

LCD bracket MH
LCD swivel arm MA
Max load kg Suitable for Code
10 AL2X upright profiles MA
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard flat-screen mount
75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens. The arm
is double articulated, turns through a radius of 180° and will extend between
95-425 mm from the upright.

LCD swivel arm MA

LCD swivel arm MA2

Max load kg Suitable for Code
15 AL2X upright profiles MA2
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard, widely used flat-
screen mount 75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens.
The arm is double articulated, turns through a radius of 180° and will extend
between 95-425 mm from the upright.

LCD swivel arm MA2

LCD screen holder with height adjustable arm MA4

Max load kg Suitable for Code
2-7 kg AL2X upright profiles MA4
Highly ergonomic and easily height adjustable monitor arm with a gas spring.
Easy mounting of the monitor with a quick-release mechanism, standard flat screen
mount 75 x 75 mm and 100 x100 mm for LCD screens. Cable management
by cable clips. The double arm turns through a radius of 180 and will extend
between 80–500 mm from the upright.

LCD screen holder MA4

Tablet bracket MY
Suitable for Code
MH, MA or MA2 MY
For 7-10” tablets. Requires either an MH, MA or MA2 swivel arm.

Tablet bracket MY

76 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 Accessories for TPH and TPB

Metal shelf TH
Size Max Suitable for Code Code
W x D mm load kg ESD
1119 x 145 30 TPH712 TH120 TH120 ESD
1419 x 145 30 TPH715/ 915, TH150 TH150 ESD
TPB915
1719 x 145 30 TPH718/ 918, TH180 TH180 ESD
TPB918
Adjustment for depth, height and angle. For stacking and picking bins. Load Metal shelf TH
capacity 30 kg.

Bin profile BP
Width mm Max load kg Suitable for Code Code ESD
profile 1115 15 TPH712 BP120 BP120 ESD
profile 1415 15 TPH715/ 915, BP150 BP150 ESD
TPB915
profile 1715 15 TPH718/ 918, BP180 BP180 ESD Bin profile BP
TPB918
Aluminium profile for stacking and picking bins.

Auxiliary steel shelf ASSA

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
217 x 298 x 20 BP ASSA4
159 x 254 x 50 BP ASSA5 Auxiliary steel shelf ASSA
Shelf for A4/A5 paper and tape dispensers (max 2 pcs per shelf). Mounted
on bin profile. Max load 3 kg.

Stacking bin set SBS4

Size W x D x Hmm Suitable for Code
2 pcs 230 x 155 x 140 BP SBS4
2 pcs 185 x 125 x 115
Four bins made of blue polypropylene (PP). Stacking bin set SBS4

Auxiliary shelf SH
Size Max Suitable for Code Code ESD
W x D mm load kg
1200 x 310 50 TPH712 SH120 SH120 ESD
1500 x 310 50 TPH715/ 915 SH150 SH150 ESD
1800 x 310 50 TPH718/ 918 SH180 SH180 ESD
Height adjustable shelf. 25 mm laminated chipboard. Auxiliary shelf SH

Divider hoops PDH

Height mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
400 SH shelf PDH PDH
Used in combination with shelf SH. Comes in sets of 5.

Divider hoops PDH

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 77

 ACCESSORIES TPH and TPB

Backstop LIST
Size Suitable for Code ESD
W x D x H mm
1400 x 52 x 27 AT 150TPH, SH150, SH150 ESD LIST150
1700 x 52 x 27 AT 180TPH, SH180, SH180 ESD LIST180
Prevents items from falling off the shelf. Can be fixed on the lower shelf AT or
on the shelf ALH.
Backstop LIST

Tool and lighting support KT

Size Suitable for Code Code ESD
W x D mm
1200 x 600 TPH712 KT120 KT120
1500 x 600 TPH715/915 KT150 KT150
and TPB915
1800 x 600 TPH718/ 918 KT180 KT180
and TPB918 Tool and lighting support KT
Extra C-profile 1500 KT150 SPR150 SPR150
Extra C-profile 1800 KT180 SPR180 SPR180
For suspending power tools and lighting units. Includes one C-profile bar with
sliding hook.

Upright profiles HKCP

Height mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
1470 TPH/TPB HKCP147 HKCP147 Upright profiles HKCP
If you mount both perforated panel RL and cable channel TJK to TPH benches,
you must order extra-high upright profiles.

Swivel arm with tray CKV

Size Max Suitable for Code Code ESD
W x D mm load kg
Tray 460 x 210 15 TPH/TPB CKV400 CKV400 ESD
Swivel arm with tray CKV
Swivel arm with lockable, angle adjustable steel tray. Load 15 kg. Mount on
C-profile.

Component rack EPL

Size Suitable for Shelves Code ESD
W x D x H mm number
455 x 200 x 290 CKV 3 EPL12 ESD
Rack with three fixed shelves. Of semiconductive epoxy powder coated steel
in light grey (RAL 7035).
Component rack EPL, swivel arm with tray AKV and bins

Tool holder box PPH

Size Suitable for Code
W x D x H mm
400 x 300 x 140 All benches PPH TXL
PPH TXL with two blue plastic bins type 3020.

Tool holder box PPH

78 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES TPH and TPB

LCD bracket MH
Max load kg Suitable for Code
15 TPH/TPB+ AS2 MH
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard used flat-screen
mount 75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens.
Adapter set AS2 is needed for mounting LCD bracket MH to TPH benches,
ordered separately.

LCD bracket MH

LCD swivel arm MA

Max load kg Suitable for Code
10 TPH/TPB+ AS2 MA
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard flat-screen mount
75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat-screens. The arm
is double articulated, turns through a radius of 180° and will extend between
95-425 mm from the upright. Adapter set AS2 is needed for mounting
LCD swivel arm MA to TPH benches, ordered separately.

LCD swivel arm MA

LCD swivel arm MA2

Max load kg Suitable for Code
15 TPH/TPB+ AS2 MA2
The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard, widely used
flat-screen mount 75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal
flatscreens.The arm is double articulated, turns through a radius of 180° and
will extend between 95-425 mm from the upright. Adapter set AS2 is needed
for mounting LCD swivel arm MA2 to TPH benches, ordered separately.
LCD swivel arm MA2

LCD screen holder with height adjustable arm MA4

Max load kg Suitable for Code
2-7 TPH/TPB + AS4C MA4
Highly ergonomic and easily height adjustable monitor arm with a gas spring.
Easy mounting of the monitor with a quick- release mechanism, standard flat
screen mount 75 x 75 and 100 x100 for LCD screens. Cable management by
cable clips. The double arm turns through a radius of 180 and will extend
between 80-500 mm from the upright. Adapter AS4C is needed for mounting
LCD screen holder MA4
LCD swivel arm MA4 to TPH/TPB benches, ordered separately.

Adapter set AS
Suitable for Code
MH / MA / MA2 AS2
MA4 AS4C
The above adapter sets / adapters are needed for fixing MH/MA/MA2/
MA4 arms to the TPH/TPB C-profiles
Adapter set AS2 Adapter AS4C

Tablet bracket MY
Suitable for Code
MH, MA or MA2 MY
For 7-10” tablets. Requires either an MH, MA or MA2 swivel arm.

Tablet bracket MY

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 79

 ACCESSORIES TPH and TPB

CPU holder
Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
180-225 x 450 x 50 20 TP/TPH 854 440-49

Cable clip set CC

Set Max load kg Suitable for Code Code ESD
5 pcs/set 15 TPH/TPB CC12 CC 12
The cable clip set will hold cables etc. securely and neatly in place along the
bench frame. The clips locate in the 12 mm profile slot.
CPU holder Cable clip set CC

Recycling material bin PRMB

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
530 x 280 x 585 WB, TP, TPH, TPB, TED benches PRMB
The 60 ltr bin with steel brackets has a maximum load of 15 kg and can be
positioned on either side or rear of the bench.

Recycling material bin PRMB3 Recycling material bin Recycling material bin
Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code PRMB PRMB3
286 x 570 x 650 WB, Concept, TP, TPH and TPB PRMB3
This pull-out model with steel rails is fixed under the worktop. Bin 60 ltr. Max
load 15 kg.

Cable tidy TPHCT

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
1115 x 45 x 205 TPH712 TPHCT120 TPHCT120
1415 x 45 x 205 TPH715/ 915 TPHCT150 TPHCT150 Cable tidy TPHCT
1715 x 45 x 205 TPH718/ 918 TPHCT180 TPHCT180
Mounted between C-profiles below worktop. Of perforated epoxy powder
coated steel.

Perforated panel RL
Size W x H mm Suitable for Code Code ESD
1115 x 750 TPH712 RL120 RL120
1415 x 750 TPH715/ 915 RL150 RL150
1715 x 750 TPH718/ 918 RL180 RL180
Perforated panel RL
Connector set for RL
TPH RK1 RK1
perforated panels
Robust, perforated steel panel. 9 mm perforations at 38 mm centres. Mount
on TPH-benches with connectors RK 1. Can also be attached to a wall with
screws (included).

Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
159 x 243 x 56 Perforated panel RL ASSA5PP Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel
Auxiliary steel shelf for A5 documents, tape dispenser or handheld scanner.
Attached to the perforated panel.

Pull-out steel shelf for printer

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
500 x 510 x 515 35 Concept ,TPB PSP50
Suitable for 750 and 900 deep Concept benches.
Pull-out steel shelf for printer

80 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES TPH and TPB

Power rails
Description Length Code
3 sockets + 2 x USB 331 TPR3-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 468 TPR4-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 468 TPR4-003
4 sockets + switch + fault current protection 468 TPR4-004
6 sockets + switch 468 TPR4-005
5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-001
5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 683 TPR7-003
4 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-008
10 sockets + switch 683 TPR7-038
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-001
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 836 TPR9-003
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-010
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-001
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-010
6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1700 TPR17-001 Power rails
6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 1700 TPR17-010
2 x USB
More information and images on power rails on page 84.

Shelf for packing material SPM

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
467 x 600 x 32 60 M500 SPM500-49
717 x 600 x 32 60 M750 SPM750-49
870 x 600 x 32 60 M900 SPM900-49
1167 x 600 x 32 60 M1200 SPM1200-49 Shelf for packing material, adjustable fastening set under
1317 x 600 x 32 60 M1350 SPM1350-49 worktop and divider hoops
1467 x 600 x 32 60 M1500 SPM1500-49
1773 x 600 x 32 60 M1800 SPM1800-49
The shelf does not include fastening parts.

Adjustable fastening set under worktop

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
90 x 350 x 355 SPM-shelves SPMAF-49
Free space 285-465 mm on lower shelf.
Adjustable fastening set under worktop

Divider hoops set (4 pcs)

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
8 x 400 x 280 SPM-shelves PDH600-49

Fixed tape dispenser

Suitable for Code
Concept, TPB, TED FTD50 Fixed tape dispenser Basic label dispenser
Includes screws to fix the dispenser to ASSA4 (see page 58). Max roll Ø 120
mm and width 50 mm.

Basic label dispenser +

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code Additional packing accessories on page 64.
214 x 128 x 120 Concept, TPB, TED BLD20
Can be fixed with screws. Max roll Ø 220 mm and width 210 mm.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 81

 Accessories that suit all benches
Note! Not suitable for Quick Edge

Equipment tray with bench top fixing

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
250 x 250 x 90 5 all benches 860 885-49

Document holder A4 with bench top fixing

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
290 x 330 5 all benches 860 882-49
Equipment tray Document holder

Tool panel with bench top fixing

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
267 x 305 5 all benches 860 883-49

Bin rail with bench top fixing

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
315 x 72 5 all benches 860 884-49
Tool panel Bin rail

Light arm, bench top fixing

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code
200 5 all benches 860 990-49

Bag holder for bench top lower edge

Suitable for Code
all benches 860 840-49 Light arm Bag holder

Keyboard tray NT
Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
525 x 399 x 133 (outer) WB and TP/TPH benches, NT 500 ESD
500 x 250 x 110 (inner) SAP/WTR trolleys

Recycling material bin PRMB3 with steel rails

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code Keyboard tray NT Recycling material bin
282 x 590 x 650 WB, Concept, TP, TPH and TPB PRMB3 PRMB3

Tool holder box PPH

Size W x D x H mm Suitable for Code
400 x 300 x 140 all benches PPH TXL

Keyboard tray (attached to the bench top)

Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Suitable for Code Tool holder box PPH Keyboard tray (attached
680 x 375 x 106 (outer) 10 all benches 925 49 001P to the bench top)
620 x 305 x 90 (inner)

82 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES All benches

ESD accessories

Earthing supplies
Name Press button Resistance Code
Earthing box 3 x 10 mm 1 Mohm J6603
Earth junction box, yellow. Cable 2 m. 860 522-00
Earthing cable, black, 1,5 m 10 mm / 1 Mohm 860 520-00
M5 terminal
Earthing cable 5 m 10 mm MK3040
Press stud 10 mm / female PN3034

Earthing box Earth junction box, yellow

Wrist straps
Name Press button Resistance Code
Adjustable wrist strap 7 mm 1 Mohm R2216
Metal wrist strap 7 mm 1 Mohm R2206
Wrist strap set includes wrist band and coiled cord. Earth lead with 1 megaohm
resistor, length 3,6 m. Includes 7 mm press stud for connection to wrist strap and
10 mm press stud for connection to earthing point.

Earthing cable, black Earthing cable

ESD mats
Name Size W x D mm Code
ESD Ergo floor mat 950 x 650 852 880-00
ESD bench top mat* 1,22 x 10,00 m (12,20 m²) PM157
*Resistant to heat, solder flux, most chemicals and solvents. The ESD mats are to
EN 61340-5-1 standards. Abraded non slip underside. Does not contain PVC.
Supplied by the metre or in rolls. Colour: platinum grey. Resistance surface to
ground: 7,5 x 10 5 - 10 7 ohm.

Press stud Adjustable wrist strap

Metal wrist strap ESD Ergo floor mat ESD bench top mat

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 83

 ACCESSORIES All benches

Treston power rails

New Treston power rails include USB-charging and also fault current protection is available in most of the standard rail lengths
available from stock. Stock selection also includes three lengths with 2 x CAT6A data connectors. Also versions with other
data and audio connectors and customised combinations of these are available on request.

Power rails come with brackets for fixing to Treston workstations. Rails can be fixed vertically on upright or aluminum profile,
horizontally on aluminum profile or on M750 and M900 modules between uprights. With the new bracket set rails can also
be fixed straight to the table top or perforated panel. A power rail can be mounted to four different angle on brackets. Length
of rail can limit the mounting possibilities.

Ideal mounting for different lengths

Code Length Concept, Workshop, WB Aluminum profile TPH TED
TP Uprights
TPR3- 331 Vertical Hor/Ver On table top Upright vertical
TPR4- 468 Vertical Hor/Ver On table top On table top
TPR7- 683 M750 horizontal Hor/Ver On table top M750
TPR9- 836 M900 horizontal Hor/Ver On table top M900
TPR14- 1400 On table top On table top On table top On table top
TPR17- 1700 On table top On table top On table top

84 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES All benches

Power rails
Description Length Code
1 3 sockets + 2 x USB 331 TPR3-001
2 6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 468 TPR4-001
3 6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 468 TPR4-003
4 4 sockets + switch + fault current protection 468 TPR4-004
5 6 sockets + switch 468 TPR4-005
6 5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-001
7 5 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 683 TPR7-003
8 4 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 683 TPR7-008
9 10 sockets + switch 683 TPR7-038
10 6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-001
11 6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB + 2 x CAT6A 836 TPR9-003
12 6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 836 TPR9-010
13 6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-001
14 6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 1400 TPR14-010
13 6 sockets + switch + 2 x USB 1700 TPR17-001
14 6 sockets + switch + fault current protection + 2 x USB 1700 TPR17-010

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 11 12

13 14

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 85

 Packing material roll stands and cutters

High packing material roll stand

Size Module Max roll Code
W x D x H mm width mm
1380 x 764 x 1640 M1350 1200 890 520-49P
1530 x 764 x 1640 M1500 1400 890 521-49P
1830 x 764 x 1640 M1800 1700 890 522-49P
High stand for two rolls. The rolls are adjustable in height. Axle diameter 25 mm.
Max roll Ø 800 mm. Can be equipped with extra roll holder set, castor set and
cutter PPC. Max load 40 kg per roll.

Low packing material roll stand

Size Module Max roll Code
W x D x H mm width mm
High packing material roll stand
1380 x 764 x 1000 M1350 1200 859 103-49P
1530 x 764 x 1000 M1500 1400 859 105-49P
1830 x 764 x 1000 M1800 1700 859 108-49P
Low stand for one roll. The roll is adjustable in height. Axle diameter 25 mm.
Max roll Ø 800 mm. Can be equipped with extra roll holder set, castor set and
cutter PPC. Max load 40 kg per roll.

Low packing material roll stand

Castor set for packing material roll stands

Size mm Code
Ø 100 LCS100
4 swivel castors Ø 100 mm, 2 with brakes. Attached directly to the stands.

Castor set for packing material roll stands

Extra roll holder set
Module Max roll width mm Code
M1350 1200 859 040-49P
M1500 1400 859 041-49P
M1800 1700 859 042-49P
Extra roll holder set for packing material roll stands. Including brackets. Axle
diameter 25 mm, zinc electroplated. Max load 40 kg.

Extra roll holder set

86 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 ACCESSORIES Packing material roll stands and cutters

Cutter PPC
Size Module Cutting width Code
W x D x H mm mm
1350 x 130 x 200 M1350 1110 PPC135
1485 x 130 x 200 M1500 1250 PPC150
1785 x 130 x 200 M1800 1550 PPC180
The round cutting knife will slice through paper and cardboard with ease. Can
be affixed to the bench top or alternatively to the upright profiles with fixing
brackets PPC FB.

Cutter PPC

Fixing brackets for cutter

Suitability Code
TPB/Concept upright profiles PPC FB
In order to obtain an ergonomic position, the cutters can also be affixed to the
upright profiles of all the workbenches using these fixing brackets. The fixing
brackets make the cutter both height and tilt adjustable, tilt 30 degrees. Cutter
is ordered separately.

Fixing brackets for cutter

Bracket pair for cutter

Suitability Code
Packing material roll stands 890 511-49P
Cutter PPC can be to fitted to the packing material roll stand with the bracket
pair. Height adjustable. Cutter is ordered separately.

Bracket pair for cutter

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 87

 3. Lighting

88 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 Workplaces for happier workfaces

Lighting ergonomics

2
years
GUARANTEE

Lighting is a vital part of ergonomic workspaces in industrial Lighting standard sets the expectations
environments. Light allows people to see and perform tasks
better and it affects their personal wellbeing and health. When designing workstations and their lighting, we observe
the recommendations of the EN 124641 standard on
indoor workplace lighting. The illuminance levels set by
Individually adjustable, natural workstation standards are average values, but going beyond those is
lighting means more productivity often reasonable. It is especially beneficial to increase the
Investing in individually controllable task lighting on high-quality lighting for employees over 45 years old.
workstations benefits both the employees and the employer.
Employees feel more motivated as they can adjust brightness
and preferably also colour tone to best suit themselves and Optical ergonomics need attention
the task at hand. This can lead to increased productivity, Optical ergonomics require the viewed object to be at
reduced errors and less absence, which normally affect the a suitable distance and location, in order to maintain an
company’s profitability. acceptable amount of eye movement and ensure that the
details can be seen without problems. Also, adequate
and glare-free lighting is important. When these conditions
apply and the working position is well adjusted, saving time
and money due to fewer absences and decreased stress
can be expected.

Benefits of proper adjustable lighting in

2 500 lx industrial environments include
2 200 lx

1800 lx

1 200 lx • Reduced number of errors

Decreased absenteeism
1 000 lx

750 lx •
• Increased well-being of the employees
Graph of light Illuminance • Increased productivity
Treston NaturLite LED 1200 Illuminance ±10% (@1 meter)

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 89

 LIGHTING

Treston NaturLite LED: Natural workstation

lighting for industrial environments
Good, adjustable workstation lighting is essential for work
quality and the well-being of employees. The right amount
of light at the right time also enhances productivity and
reduces errors in industrial environments.

Achieve your full potential with:

• Tunable colour tone

• Dimmable brightness
• Effective performance

Get all the specifications

and download the brochure

treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

Treston NaturLite LED Plus1200

Adjusting colour temperature can have a positive effect on employee

productivity and well-being. Beneficial also in environments where it
is important to see objects in different light ranges.

Convenient to use with

a mobile app or a remote control.

90 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 LIGHTING

1 3

Treston NaturLite LED Plus 1200 Treston NaturLite LED 900

Light with tunable colour tone Dimmable light for smaller tables

2 4

Treston NaturLite LED 1200 Treston NaturLite LED Wing 500

Dimmable light for wider tables Versatile task light with dimming

Name Control Colour Illuminance ±10% Luminous Power Size Suitability Code
temperature (@1 meter) flux WxDxH
mm
1. Treston Controlled via mobile app 2700 - @4000 K: 2800 lx 3200-6300 lm 60 W 1180 x All Treston TNL1200P
NaturLite or separate remote control 6500 K (1000 - 2800 lx (depending on 120 x 50 and various
LED Plus 1200 + ON/OFF button in the depending on the the selected other industrial
luminaire body colour temperature) colour temper- workbenches
ature)
Remote control Easy to use and save 90 x Treston NaturLite TNLPR
for Treston presets via mobile app. 90 x 12 LED Plus 1200
NaturLite LED White.
Plus 1200
2. Treston Touch dim button switch for 4000 K 3100 lx 7100 lm 56 W 1180 x All Treston TNL1200
NaturLite ON/OFF and dimming in 120 x 50 and various
LED 1200 the luminaire body other industrial
workbenches
3. Treston Touch dim button switch for 4000 K 2300 lx 5200 lm 42 W 900 x All Treston TNL900
NaturLite ON/OFF and dimming in 120 x 50 and various
LED 900 the luminaire body other industrial
workbenches
4. Treston Touch dim button switch for 4000 K 800 lx 1750 lm 14 W 430 x 120 x Concept, WB, TED TNL500W
NaturLite ON/OFF and dimming in 50 mm and TP benches,
LED Wing 500 the luminaire body (+ bracket Treston Tower,
95/120 mm) TPH and TPB
benches*
Common features: Dimmable, Lifetime > 50 000 hours (L90B10), Color Rendering Index CRI > 80, High quality LED (MacAdams < 3)
Aluminium body, 2 years guarantee, Enclosure protection IP20
* TPH and TPB benches require bracket 890 683-49

Watch this animation and get the main facts of the Treston NaturLite
LED lights in less than 2 minutes:
TRESTON https://vimeo.com/241502723
- ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 91
 LIGHTING

Cutting edge technology

• Tunable colour tone (2700-6500 K) • Dimmable 1/10-100%

• Power 14-60 W (max) • Lean design
• Illuminance 800-3100 lx ±10 % (1 meter) • 2 years guarantee
• Lifetime > 50 000 hours (L90B10) • Suitable for all Treston and various other industrial
workbenches
• Color Rendering Index CRI > 80
• Enclosure protection IP20
• High quality LED (MacAdams < 3)

✓ Adjustability helps to find optimal lighting conditions.

✓ Timeless design brings functional beauty to industrial

environments and it is never out of style.

✓ Easy and fast to install – just click, slide and screw.

✓ High-quality LED lights with high-quality drivers are care-free for

years to come. Low maintenance, just keep them clean!

✓ Designed and manufactured in Finland.

Treston NaturLite
LED Wing 500
• Versatile task light
• Working area with or without shadows
• Also suitable in the middle of the table

92 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 LIGHTING

Optimal light for industrial environments:

Treston IntoLite LED
•

✓ Good quality, bright and long lasting light.

✓ Light with basic features and capability to give optimal
light to workstation.

Name Control Colour Illuminance ±10% Luminous Power Size Suitability Code
temperature (@1 meter) flux W x D x H mm
Treston IntoLite Touch button switch for 4000K 1800 lux ±10% 3800 lm 36W 850 x 67 x 80 All Treston and TIL850
LED ON/OFF various other industrial
workbenches

Common features: Lifetime > 50 000 hours (L70B10), 2 years guarantee, Enclosure protection IP20

Compatibility with light and balancer rails

Module / suitable for Front profile width mm Code Compatible lighting units
Light and balancer rail 2 x M500 1000 91849001P TNL900, TIL850
(Concept, Workshop and TP benches) 2 x M500/1500 1500 91849002P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
4 x M500 2000 91849003P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
M750 750 91849004P -
M750/900 900 91849013P TNL900, TIL850
M750/1500 1500 91849005P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
2 x M750 1500 91849006P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
3 x M750 2250 91849012P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
M900 900 91849007P TNL900, TIL850
2 x M900 1800 91849008P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
M900/1500 1500 91849009P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
M1200 1200 91849010P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
M1350 1350 91849011P TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
Support bracket HSB AL2X110W 1073 HSB110 TNL900, TIL850
(WB benches) AL2X150W 1500 HSB150 TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
AL2X180W 1800 HSB180 TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
Tool and lighting support KT TPH712 1200 KT120 TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
(TPH and TPB benches) TPH715/915, TPB915 1500 KT150 TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850
TPH718/918, TPB918 1800 KT180 TNL900, TNL1200, TNL1200P, TIL850

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 93

 LIGHTING

Magnifying lamp
Treston Wave LED ESD
•

✓ Lamp can be easily adjusted to desired position thanks

to very precise and flexible 3-joint arm.

✓ Lamp offers shadow-free magnification with light

coming from both sides.

✓ Wave LED ESD is suitable for use in EPA-areas.

✓ Suitable for all Treston Workbenches and other

manufacturers' workbenches

Name Control Colour Illuminance ±10% Luminous Power Size Fixing Code
temperature (@1 meter) flux W x D x H mm
Treston Wave 2-sided touch button 4000K 1500 lx 764 lm 13W Lamp 227 x 225 x 40 Table clamp TWL ESD
LED ESD with 4 level dimming mm, 3-joint arm length (max thickness 72 mm)
500 + 550 mm

Common features: Lifetime > 50 000 hours, 5 years guarantee, Enclosure protection IP20. Power cord 1,7m with Schuko-plug CEE7/7.

94 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

4. Chairs

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 95

 High-performance industrial chairs with
a 10 year warranty

10
years
GUARANTEE

The new Treston chair range offers high-performance

seating solutions with maximum customer benefit for Six models with 24 variations
any industrial and technical working environment. The new chair range consists of six different models: Multi-
Our high-quality technical products fulfill the highest purpose Treston Ergo, Treston Plus with an all-inclusive
requirements, offer outstanding value for money and ergonomic package, new generation workplace chair
meet the requirements of various workplaces – from Neon with changeable upholsteries, Flex for standing
production and packaging to standing work, ESD areas work, Stool for assistance in workshops and Saddle chair
and R&D environments. for alternative way of sitting. In addition, there are three
surfaces/upholsteries to choose from: a highly resistant
Industrial workplaces require industrial chairs polyurethane, comfortable fabric and easy-to-care artificial
leather, making it is easy to find the most suitable chair for
An ergonomically sound chair is a vital part of the well- the working environment from our 24 chair variations.
functioning, ergonomic and user-friendly workstation.
Good sitting enables effective and appropriate
movements, reduces postural fixity and enables good and Safe, sound and economic solution
relaxed working postures. The ergonomic requirements of Treston chairs ensure safety in the workplace by fulfilling the
workplace chairs in industrial and technical environments requirements of DIN 68877 and by carrying the GS safety
are inherently different to those of other areas, such as mark, and in addition, our ESD chairs are in compliance
office. The jobs carried out at manufacturing workstations with EN 61340-5-1. Besides being safe and ergonomic,
may involve force, precision skills and repetitive movements, our chair selection has a full 10 year warranty*. The
and thus the workplace chair must adapt perfectly to these Treston chair range is a safe, sustainable and economic
tasks and working environments in order to support the solution for industrial seating.
workers – and their well-being- in the best possible way.

* Saddle chairs 2 years

96 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 CHAIRS
treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

READ MORE ABOUT

ergonomic sitting from our
separate brochure!

Treston Ergo
Multipurpose chair for almost any application in the industry
• User-friendly and quick adjustability
• Excellent price-performance ratio
• Large, ergonomically designed seat and backrest and lumbar support

Treston Plus
The all-inclusive ergonomic package
• Best possible adjustment to body size
• Supports the body in every position
• For any work situation

Neon
New generation workplace chair
• All the same adjustments and features as in Treston Plus
• In addition changeable upholstery and flex strip for protection of the chair and its
environment

Flex standing rest

For best support in standing work and combined workplaces
• 360° rotation of the seat, easy height adjustment of foot ring
• Space saving
• Slip resistant seat

Stools
• Optimal assistance in workshop and heavy duty applications
• Adjustment for seat height

Saddle chairs
• Freedom of movement with ergonomic sitting position
• Adjustment for seat height and seat tilt

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 97

 CHAIRS

Fabric Fabric
ESD

Treston Ergo chair with fabric upholstery

Treston Ergo 30 Treston Ergo 30 ESD Treston Ergo 35 Treston Ergo 35 ESD
With soft dual-wheel safety castors (conductive with ESD versions) with High version with foot ring and glides (conductive with ESD versions).
Description
load-sensitive brakes.
Upholstery The high-quality fabric upholstery is breathable and can both absorb and expel moisture.
Code C30BL C30BL-ESD C35BL C35BL-ESD

AL AL ESD

Treston Ergo chair with artificial leather upholstery

Treston Ergo 30 AL Treston Ergo 30 AL ESD

Description With soft dual-wheel safety castors (conductive with ESD versions) with load-sensitive brakes.
Upholstery Artificial leather upholstery is washable, resistant to disinfectants and easy to care.
Code C30AL C30AL-ESD

PU

Treston Ergo chair with polyurethane foam (PU)

Treston Ergo 20 PU Treston Ergo 20 PU ESD Treston Ergo 25 PU Treston Ergo 25 PU ESD
With soft dual-wheel safety castors (conductive with ESD versions) with High version with foot ring and glides (conductive with ESD versions).
Description
load-sensitive brakes.
Upholstery The PU surface is highly resistant, extremely robust, washable and very easy to clean.
Code C20PU C20PU-ESD C25PU C25PU-ESD

98 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 CHAIRS

Fabric Fabric
ESD

AL AL ESD

Treston Plus chair with fabric or artificial leather upholstery

Treston Plus 40 BL Treston Plus 40 BL ESD Treston Plus 40 AL Treston Plus 40 AL ESD
Description With soft dual-wheel safety castors (conductive with ESD versions) with load-sensitive brakes
Upholstery Black fabric Black fabric ESD Artificial leather Artificial leather ESD
Code C40BL C40BL-ESD C40AL C40AL-ESD

Fabric
ESD

Neon chair with fabric upholstery

Neon 50 ESD
Description With conductive soft dual-wheel safety castors with load-sensitive brakes.
Upholstery Black fabric ESD, grey flex strip
Code C50BL-G-ESD

PU

Flex standing rest with polyurethane foam (PU)

Flex 19 Flex 19 ESD
Description High version with foot ring and glides (conductive with ESD versions).
Upholstery The PU surface is highly resistant, extremely robust, washable and very easy to clean.
Code C19PU C19PU-ESD

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 99

 CHAIRS

PU AL ESD

Stool with polyurethane foam (PU) or artificial leather

Stool PU Stool AL-ESD
Description With soft dual-wheel safety castors (conductive with ESD versions) with load-sensitive brakes
Upholstery Polyurethane PU Artificial leather ESD
Code C15PU C15AL-ESD

Fabric Fabric
ESD

Leather AL ESD

Saddle chair with fabric or (artificial) leather upholstery

Saddle B Saddle G ESD Saddle AL ESD Saddle L
Description With soft dual-wheel safety castors (conductive with ESD versions) with load-sensitive brakes
Upholstery Blue fabric Grey fabric ESD Artificial leather ESD Leather
Code SADDLE B SADDLE G ESD SADDLE AL ESD SADDLE L

Seat height Seat tilt Seat depth Backrest height Weight Permanent Synchronous
regulation contact mechanism
backrest

Adjustments and Flex –

Treston Ergo Treston Plus Neon Stool Saddle chair
features standing rest
Seat height ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Seat tilt ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Seat depth ✓ ✓
Backrest height ✓ ✓ ✓
Contact backrest ✓
Synchro mechanism ✓ ✓
Arm rests as an option ✓ ✓ ✓
Changeable upholstery ✓

100 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 CHAIRS

Code Description / Upholstery / Colour Martindale Seat height, Seat width, Seat depth, Backrest Weight,
mm* mm mm height, mm kg
Stools
C15PU Stool 15 polyurethane black 460-630 350 350 7,0
C15AL-ESD Stool 15 artificial leather black ESD 50.000 460-630 400 400 8,0
Flex standing rests
C19PU Flex 19 polyurethane black 510-780 360 380 200 13,0
C19PU-ESD Flex 19 polyurethane black ESD 510-780 360 380 200 13,0
Treston Ergo chairs
C20PU Treston Ergo 20 polyurethane black 440-620 440 410 380 11,5
C20PU-ESD Treston Ergo 20 polyurethane black ESD 440-620 440 410 380 13,0
C25PU Treston Ergo 25 polyurethane black 580-850 440 410 380 13,5
C25PU-ESD Treston Ergo 25 polyurethane black ESD 580-850 440 410 380 15,0
C30AL Treston Ergo 30 articial leather black 50.000 440-620 460 470 460 12,0
C30AL-ESD Treston Ergo 30 articial leather black ESD 50.000 440-620 460 470 460 13,0
C30BL Treston Ergo 30 fabric black 50.000 440-620 460 470 460 12,0
C30BL-ESD Treston Ergo 30 fabric black ESD 40.000 440-620 460 470 460 13,0
C35BL Treston Ergo 35 fabric black 50 000 580-850 460 470 460 14,0
C35BL-ESD Treston Ergo 35 fabric black ESD 40.000 530-800 460 470 460 15,0
Treston Plus chairs
C40AL Treston Plus 40 artificial leather black 50.000 450-600 460 410-470 600 18,5
C40AL-ESD Treston Plus 40 artificial leather black ESD 50.000 450-600 460 410-470 600 19,5
C40BL Treston Plus 40 fabric black 50.000 450-600 460 410-470 600 18,5
C40BL-ESD Treston Plus 40 fabric black ESD 40.000 450-600 460 410-470 600 19,5
Neon chairs
C50BL-G-ESD Neon 50 fabric black ESD grey strips 40.000 450-620 470 420-480 570 18,0
Saddle chairs
SADDLE B Saddle chair fabric blue > 50.000 575-820 420 350 7,0
SADDLE G ESD Saddle chair fabric grey ESD > 50.000 575-820 420 350 7,0
SADDLE AL ESD Saddle chair articial leather ESD black 575-820 420 350 7,0
SADDLE L Saddle chair leather black 575-820 420 350 7,0
*According to the DIN 68877, the seat height is measured from the floor to the centre of the seat with a 64-kg load. The maximum load capacity of the chairs is
120 kg.

Accessories for chairs

Product Description Code Code ESD
High glide set Abrasion-resistant plastic glides have a large surface area and offer superb level of stability. CGLIH CGLIH-ESD
The glides can be retrofitted to of all our chairs.
Soft castor set for hard floor Dual-wheel safety castors are equipped with load-sensitive brakes, which means that the CSCAS CSCAS-ESD
castors will brake when unloaded. As a standard, we supply soft castors for hard floors, but
Hard castor set for soft floor hard castors for soft floors need to be ordered separately. CHCAS CHCAS-ESD
Soft Stop&Go castor set In case the high chair needs to be moved around the workplace, Stop&Go castors will CSTOP CSTOP-ESD
for hard floors provide a safe solution. These castors will brake as soon as they are loaded, but when not
loaded, the chair is easy to move around.
4D armrests for Treston Ergo and Adjustment of height, width and depth with the possibility to swivel. ARE
Treston Plus
4D ESD armrests for Treston Ergo Adjustment of height, width and depth with the possibility to swivel. ARE-ESD
ESD and Treston Plus ESD

4D armrests for Neon Adjustment of height, width and depth with the possibility to swivel. ARN-ESD
Chrome-plated foot ring Foot ring can also be retrofitted to our lower chair models by attaching it to the chair column. CRING CRING
Can be used on both ESD and non-ESD models. The height can be easily adjusted without any
tools.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 101

 5. Trolleys

102 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 Work smarter, not harder

Freedom of mobility with trolleys

Work is not always confined to a single workstation and tools must be moved around accordingly. Lightweight
trolleys are ideal for this situation, significantly increasing productivity up to 30%.

The trolleys provide extra work or storage space and can be used,
for example, to transport various items, to store measuring units and
keep a buffer stock on a production line.

Each task is different and requires dedicated tools. Due to their

modularity and versatile accessory components, trolleys are easy to
design and adapt to suit a multitude of users and applications.

Watch this video: "How to choose an ergonomic trolley for

industrial tasks" https://vimeo.com/504278340
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 103
 TROLLEYS

Ergonomics for manual handling of loads

Manual handling of loads (also known as MMH – manual materials handling) means moving or handling things by lifting,
lowering, pushing, pulling, carrying, holding, or restraining. Manual handling of loads is generally considered to be an
occupational risk factor for low back and shoulder complaints and it is in fact the most common cause of occupational fatigue,
low back pain and lower back injuries. Therefore, it should not come as a surprise that paying attention to ergonomics for
manual handling of loads is extremely important for the safety and health of the workers as well as for the efficiency and
productivity of the processes.

Pushing and pulling from an ergonomics

viewpoint
Pushing and pulling are the two physical tasks most POOR
VERY
POOR
commonly related to working on and operating trolleys. The
most common risk factors, related to pushing and pulling
tasks, which could hinder the ergonomics, are forceful Shoulder
pushing/pulling, trolley design that does not promote height

neutral body postures, wrong direction of exerted forces FAIR POOR VERY
POOR
(e.g. pulling when you should be pushing), one handed
pushing or pulling, too heavy loads and wrong handle Elbow
height
height. VERY
POOR
Hip
A task suitable trolley that adapts to the size of the user is the GOOD POOR
height
VERY
answer to reducing the risk of work related musculoskeletal POOR
disorders (WMSD), especially for lower back, knee and Knuckle
shoulder injuries. When selecting a trolley for the task, you height
should always consider the human body power zones, FAIR POOR VERY
POOR
where people have the greatest strength and most comfort
working. See the image on the right as a reference. Trolley Knee
height
design should ensure that pushing and pulling can be done
from the optimal height, between the knuckle and shoulder
VERY
height of the worker, with the arms as close to the body POOR
POOR
as possible. Working in your power zone reduces the start
force needed for pushing and pulling, reduces the effort
and force needed to perform work tasks, and reduces the
stress on your back and shoulders.
Illustration on the power zones where people have the
greatest strength and most comfort, in regards of lifting and
placing loads, pushing and pulling (i.e. above the knees,
below the shoulders, and close to the body).

104 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS

Consider the handle position and design

Vertical handles are considered the most optimal, as every sized worker is able to grasp the handles in their unique power
zone. Handles can be horizontal as well, as long as they are the correct height for the user. Preferred handle height is
between the shoulder and knuckle height of the worker, optimising the force applied for pushing and pulling.

The optimal shape for handles is cylindrical and smooth, which allows the best power grip with straight wrists. The handle
diameter should be big enough to enable power grip instead of pinch grip. Power grip provides up to 75% more strength
compared to pinch grip. Power grip involves grasping the handle by wrapping all the fingers around it, instead of grasping
with thumb and tips of the other fingers.

Shoulder height: 1400 mm

Elbow height: 1100 mm

Hip height: 950 mm

Knuckle height: 800 mm

Knee height: 600 mm

Elbow height is the optimal position in regard to push forces. Displayed heights are indicative for average sized male.

CHANGE IN THE NATURE OF MANUAL LOAD HANDLING TASKS

In the past decades, industrial workspaces have been mostly redesigned so that carrying objects has been replaced by
transporting objects by pushing or pulling them in trolleys, carts, hand pallet trucks and such. For example, in the automotive
supply sector about 10% of all working processes involve pushing and pulling on a regular and repetitive basis.

In addition, the rapid growth of the e-commerce sector has increased the number of distribution centres worldwide. The
primary job at these distribution centres is order picking and delivery, where manual handling aids such as carts, trolleys, hand
pallet trucks and such are used to perform the tasks. The use of these aids has again eliminated carrying objects, changing the
nature of manual load handling tasks predominantly to pushing and pulling.

In general, it has been estimated that nearly half of common manual load handling tasks in workplaces consist of pushing and
pulling exertions performed on level surfaces and variable inclined ramps.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 105

 TROLLEYS

Castors play an important role

A quality castor is of the appropriate size in relation to the four swivel castors in tight spaces, making it easier to turn
working environment and purpose of the trolley. The bigger and control loads. Strong castor brakes lock the trolley in
the castor, the easier it is to move the trolley. For example, position, making sure that it stays where it is supposed to be.
big castors make it easier to push the trolley over thresholds
and other similar obstacles. The tread in quality castors Castors have a big effect in minimizing the start forces
withstands wear and tear. The wheel/tread material is not needed to get the trolley moving as well as in reducing the
the only factor influencing the usability and easy movability rolling resistance and therefore play an important role in
of the trolley, as the flooring material also affects how well ensuring proper ergonomics. The amount of force required
the castor rolls and moves. to move loads with trolleys depends on a number of factors:

Swivel castors are also handy on a trolley, making it easy • weight and shape of the load
to manoeuvre even in small spaces. We recommend using
• type and condition of floor surface (e.g. smoothness
and density)
• route taken (e.g. slopes and obstacles)
• type of castor, especially the materials used
• size of castor
• maintenance of castors – cleaning, lubricating and/or
replacing castors on a regular basis has a vital effect
in maintaining the ride comfort and minimizing the push
effort.

Task experience is the key to reducing strain

Task experience and correct working technique in pushing
and pulling play an important role in reducing some
measures of biomechanical strain and therefore yield
potential for reducing the risk of injury. For example,
pulling a lighter weight trolley at hip height, with arms
outstretched, would result in very high compressive force
at the lower back, as opposed to pushing a much heavier
trolley between shoulder and elbow height, arms closer to
body, which results in much less of a compressive force at
the lower back. As a reference, see the illustration on the
power zones where people have the greatest strength and
most comfort.

If your goal is to ensure efficient processes and ergonomic

working conditions, start by selecting the correct type of
trolley for the task and then orientating all workers with the
physical aspects and best working techniques for the specific
task at hand. No matter how fancy the features of your
trolley, if your workers use bad techniques while performing
their tasks with the trolley, you are sure to increase the risk
of injuries and create inefficiency in processes. If necessary,
modify work practices so that workers can perform their
tasks and work within their power zone.

Although there is no exact weight limit that is safe, a weight

! of 20–25 kg is heavy to lift for most people and it thus
increases the risk of back injury.

106 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS

What to consider when selecting a trolley?

Selecting the right trolley is not complicated, but there are certain considerations to take into account to ensure you
get the best possible trolley for your needs.

1. Why do you need the trolley? What is its purpose? Are flexibility and easy reconfiguration important features
of the trolley? If you have a fixed task and fixed need for the trolley, a specific trolley for that need will most likely
be the best solution for you. But if you need a trolley that can be easily adapted to changing needs and production
processes, choose a trolley that has a modular structure, a wide range of accessories, and good ergonomics, which
will help you flexibly adapt the trolley to a multitude of tasks.
2. What are the objects being handled on the trolley? Are you moving lightweight boxes of the same size
and weight or bulky equipment that can differ in size and weight? The weight and shape of the objects handled
determine the load capacity and shelf and work surface size of your trolley. If the size of handled objects varies,
select a height adjustable work surface and/or shelves to ensure proper ergonomics no matter what size of objects
you handle. Tilted shelves improve access and handling of objects, as it enables you to work from your power zone.
3. How are the objects handled? Are they sorted or unsorted? Can you stack them or are they loose? Especially
for unsorted and loose objects, it is better to equip the trolley shelves with edges and/or rubber mats, to ensure the
goods do not fall over when moving. Remember though that shelves with edges make it more difficult to handle,
lift and lay down heavy objects. Another possibility is to use a caged trolley, where the side walls of the trolley are
at least partially closed in order to help keep objects in place. Mesh panels are a good option for this: they allow
visual inspection and keep the construction light.
4. What kind of working environment is it? Do you have to enter doors with the trolley? How wide are the
walkway spaces? If you have to move through doors in different workspaces and/or long distances within the
space, checks the walkway and door widths to ensure sufficient space.
5. What type of castors should I have? A quality castor is of the appropriate size in relation to the working
environment and purpose of the trolley. Castors have a big effect in minimizing the start forces needed to get the
trolley moving as well as in reducing the rolling resistance and therefore play an important role in ensuring proper
ergonomics.
6. How about handles? Trolleys that are moved around a lot and transported for longer distances should be
equipped with at least one handle, to make handling, pushing and pulling easy, effortless and ergonomic. Vertical
handles are considered the most optimal, as every sized worker is able to grasp the handles in their unique power
zone. Preferred handle height is between the shoulder and knuckle height of the worker, optimizing the force
applied for pushing and pulling. The optimal shape for handles is cylindrical and smooth, which allows the best
power grip with straight wrists.
7. How often is the trolley used? If you have a trolley in active everyday use, invest in a high quality, reliable and
durable trolley with high quality castors. This might be a more expensive initial investment, but in the long run a high
quality trolley will pay for itself with its long lifetime and flexibility in use.
8. Consult the people using the trolley in their work. They have the best hands-on experience and can give
valuable input on the required features, such as size and load capacity, as well as on the accessories needed to
perform the work ergonomically and efficiently. Knowing your loads helps you to buy equipment of appropriate
capacity.
9. How ergonomic is the trolley? As a quick ergonomics check, make sure the handles, work surfaces, and
accessories are easily height adjustable to adjust to the worker and task at hand to ensure proper ergonomics. If
your goal is to ensure efficient processes and ergonomic working conditions, start by selecting the correct type of
trolley for the task and then orientating all workers with the physical aspects and best working techniques for the
specific task at hand. No matter how fancy the features of your trolley, if your workers use bad techniques while
performing their tasks with the trolley, you are sure to increase the risk of injuries and create inefficiency in processes.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 107

 TROLLEYS

150 kg 300 kg 150 / 300 kg

Universal trolley WTR, Industrial Multi trolley, Adjustable trolley TRTA,

page 110 page 111 page 114

Most often combined with WB This trolley can be equipped with For general use wherever a good
workstations to provide extra storage shelves, tops and other module-sized transportation and storage solution is
space. A good adjustable PC station, accessories to fit any application, such needed. Two or four shelves available;
measuring station or mobile storage, as transportation or tool storage. The height of the shelves can be adjusted.
best suitable for moving equipment trolleys support heavy loads, but they Mesh panels can be installed at the
around the workstation. are easy to move as well. ends or on the sides. Also a SMD reel
holder version available.

12 / 25 kg 90 kg 150 kg

Mobile workstations, Storage trolley, Concept trolley,

page 116 page 117 page 117

An ergonomic and versatile tool with key Simple solution for mobile storage. The Most often combined with Concept
qualities such as light weight, small size shelves are fitted with rubber mats and and WB workstations to provide extra
and excellent mobility. Used wherever a the middle shelf is adjustable. work and storage space. Lower shelf
laptop is needed on the go. is integrated. Can be equipped with
an additional shelf or drawer unit 30
series.

108 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS

150 kg 150 kg 600 kg

SAP trolley, Packing trolleys, Heavy-duty trolley,

page 117 page 118 page 120

Most often combined with TP Handy trolleys designed with packing Heavy-duty trolleys, as their name
workstations to provide extra in mind provide space to keep boxes indicates, are ideal for moving heavy
workspace. Can be equipped with and other materials within arm’s reach, loads. Their special castors support
a lower shelf, an extra shelf and a but they also can be moved aside as extremely heavy weights.
handle, available separately. needed.

300 kg 300 kg 300 kg

Fitter’s trolley, Service trolley, Bin and cabinet trolleys,

page 1212 page 122 page 124

A fitter’s trolley lets you take your The service trolley frame is equipped The bin and cabinet trolleys can be
supplies and tools wherever you with a safety locking feature that equipped with Treston stacking bins
go, while keeping them organised. allows only one drawer to be and bin cabinets based on own needs.
Rubber mats and ESD-mats for shelves opened at a time. Trolleys enable supplies and parts to
available separately. be moved smoothly to wherever they
are needed.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 109

 TROLLEYS Universal trolley WTR

Universal trolley WTR

A good quality, versatile trolley, PC-station, measuring station or mobile
storage trolley. Modern industrial design.

The standard trolley has 3 shelves (TS 605), size 650 x 530 mm. Height
adjustment of shelves is by allen-key. The vertical profiles are of aluminium.
Frames are of epoxy powder coated steel: light grey RAL 7035. The 6
worktops are of 25 mm laminated particle board. Four swivel castors (Ø
125 mm) two of which have brakes, overall height of castor 141 mm.

2
Universal trolley WTR
Name Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
1. Universal trolley 660 x 650 x 1415 150 WTR140 WTR140 ESD
2. Extra shelf 530 x 650 50 TS605 TS605 ESD
3. Adjustable shelf* 530 x 650 50 TAS605 TAS605 ESD
4. Bin profile Length 525 BP50 BP50 ESD
5. Power rail Length 468 mm TPR4-001
6. Keyboard tray NT 525 x 399 x 133 (outer) - NT 500 ESD
500 x 250 x 110 (inner)
*Continuous adjustment for depth, height and angle.

4
3

110 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Industrial Multi trolley

Treston Industrial Multi trolley

Multi trolleys provide an ergonomic mobile workstation. Multi trolleys are
available in three different widths: M500, M750 and M900. This means that
all our module-sized accessories can be used with the trolleys.

The sturdy shelves can be height-adjusted and tilted. Shelves come with raised
edges which keep the load in place. Rubber mats and ESD-mats for shelves
available separately.

Multi trolleys support heavy loads, but they are easy to move as well, making
it simple to transport heavy equipment, such as measuring units. They are
equipped with four swivel castors (Ø 125 mm), two of which have brakes.

Treston Industrial Multi trolley with adjustable shelves

Description Module Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
1. 4 adjustable shelves M500 540 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH5-002-41 TMTH5-002-49
M750 790 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH7-002-41 TMTH7-002-49 1
M900 943 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH9-002-41 TMTH9-002-49
2. 2 adjustable shelves M500 540 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTL5-002-41 TMTL5-002-49
M750 790 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTL7-002-41 TMTL7-002-49
M900 943 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTL9-002-41 TMTL9-002-49
Bottom shelf and mats for shelves, see page 113.

Treston Industrial Multi trolley with shelves

Description Module Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
3. 4 shelves M500 540 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH5-001-41 TMTH5-001-49
M750 790 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH7-001-41 TMTH7-001-49
M900 943 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH9-001-41 TMTH9-001-49
4. 2 shelves M500 540 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTL5-001-41 TMTL5-001-49
M750 790 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTL7-001-41 TMTL7-001-49
M900 943 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTL9-001-41 TMTL9-001-49
Bottom shelf and mats for shelves, see page 113.

2 4 3

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 111

 TROLLEYS Industrial Multi trolley

1. Treston Industrial Multi trolley with perforated panels

Module Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
M750 790 x 760 x1790 300 TMTH7-005-07 TMTH7-005-49
M900 943 x 760 x1790 300 TMTH9-005-07 TMTH9-005-49 1

2. Treston Industrial Multi trolley with tilted perforated panels

Module Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
- 820 x 760 x 1860 300 TMTA-41 TMTA-49

3. Treston Industrial Multi trolley with perforated tool cabinet 3

Module Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
M750 790 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTH7-104-07

Industrial Multi trolley frame and accessories

• Equip your trolleys with shelves, tops and other accessories to fit
any application, such as transportation or tool storage.
Treston Industrial Multi
• All trolleys are equipped with four swivel castors (Ø 125 mm), two Trolley Frame High
of which have brakes.

• Can easily be customised with a wide range of accessories, to

meet individual needs.

Treston Industrial Multi trolley frame

Name Module Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
Frame High M500 540 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTFH5-41 TMTFH5-49
Frame High M750 790 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTFH7-41 TMTFH7-49
Frame High M900 943 x 760 x 1790 300 TMTFH9-41 TMTFH9-49
Frame Low M500 540 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTFL5-41 TMTFL5-49
Frame Low M750 790 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTFL7-41 TMTFL7-49
Frame Low M900 943 x 760 x 1150 300 TMTFL9-41 TMTFL9-49

Treston Industrial Multi

Trolley Low
112 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 TROLLEYS Industrial Multi trolley

Bottom shelf
Name Module Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code ESD
Bottom shelf M500 x 728 M500 460 x 728 x 33 100 TMTLS5-49
Bottom shelf M750 x 728 M750 710 x 728 x 33 100 TMTLS7-49
Bottom shelf M900 x 728 M900 863 x 728 x 33 100 TMTLS9-49
Mats for bottom shelves see page 113.

Steel shelf
Name Module Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code ESD
Steel shelf M500 x 650 + brackets M500 468 x 650 x 33 100 TMTS5-49
Steel shelf M750 x 650 + brackets M750 718 x 650 x 33 100 TMTS7-49
Steel shelf M900 x 650 + brackets M900 871 x 650 x 33 100 TMTS9-49
Mats for steel shelves see page 113.

Adjustable shelf, stepless tilt

Name Module Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code ESD
Adjustable shelf M500 x 650 M500 468 x 650 x 37 100 TMTAS5-49
Adjustable shelf M750 x 650 M750 718 x 650 x 37 100 TMTAS7-49
Adjustable shelf M900 x 650 M900 871 x 650 x 37 100 TMTAS9-49
Mats for adjustable shelves see page 113.

Adjustable shelf, stepless depth and tilt

Name Module Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code ESD
Adjustable shelf M500 x 650 M500 468 x 650 x 37 50 TMTSAS5-49
Adjustable shelf M750 x 650 M750 718 x 650 x 37 50 TMTSAS7-49
Adjustable shelf M900 x 650 M900 871 x 650 x 37 50 TMTSAS9-49
Mats for adjustable shelves see page 113.

Mats for shelves

Suitability Module Size Code Code ESD
W x D mm
Lower shelf TMTLS5-49 M500 455 x 723 725742-00 725750-00
Lower shelf TMTLS7-49 M750 705 x 723 725739-00 725747-00
Lower shelf TMTLS9-49 M900 858 x 723 725740-00 725748-00
Steel shelf TMTS5-49 M500 463 x 645 725738-00 725746-00
Steel shelf TMTS7-49 M750 713 x 645 725735-00 725743-00
Steel shelf TMTS9-49 M900 866 x 645 725736-00 725744-00
Adjustable shelf TMTAS5-49 and TMTSAS5-49 M500 428 x 600 860823-00 860821-00
Adjustable shelf TMTAS7-49 and TMTSAS7-49 M750 678 x 600 860548-00 860318-00
Adjustable shelf TMTAS9-49 and TMTSAS9-49 M900 831 x 600 860550-00 860320-00

Industrial Multi trolley accessories

Name Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
Wash basket L-300 380 x 302 x 110 20 839 116-51 -
Waste basket 839 159-00 -
Waste basket holder* - 835 773-49
Paper roll holder* Roll dimensions max: width 240 mm, Ø 230 mm) 860 310-49
Flow-through shelf** 718 x 835 x 61 150 - 890 710-49
For perforated panels, see page 169, for R-hooks, see page 176.
* fixing to upright
**including brackets

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 113

 TROLLEYS Adjustable trolley TRTA

Adjustable trolley TRTA

For general use in workshops, offices, production areas and hospitals.
Shelves are powder coated steel, RAL 7035 ESD, height 28 mm. All
shelves are individually adjustable. The structure is light but sturdy. The
end-frames of the trolley are made of round, powder coated steel
tube (25 mm). Four swivel castors (Ø 125 mm), two of which have
brakes.

Adjustable trolley TRTA

Name Size Shelf size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm W x D mm load kg
2-shelf trolley* 890 x 530 x 1020 800 x 430 150 TRTA4082 TRTA4082 ESD
2-shelf trolley* 1090 x 530 x 1020 1000 x 430 150 TRTA4102 TRTA4102 ESD
2-shelf trolley* 890 x 630 x 1020 800 x 530 150 TRTA5082 TRTA5082 ESD
2-shelf trolley* 1090 x 630 x1020 1000 x 530 150 TRTA5102 TRTA5102 ESD
4-shelf trolley** 1090 x 530 x 1515 1000 x 430 300 TRTA4104 TRTA4104 ESD
4-shelf trolley** 1090 x 630 x 1515 1000 x 530 300 TRTA5104 TRTA5104 ESD
* Shelf adjustments between 200-770 mm
** Shelf adjustments between 200-1340 mm

Extra shelves TRHA

Name Shelf size Max load kg Code Code ESD
W x D mm
Extra shelf 800 x 430 50 TRHA408 TRHA408 ESD
Extra shelf 1000 x 430 50 TRHA410 TRHA410 ESD
Extra shelf 800 x 530 50 TRHA508 TRHA508 ESD
Extra shelf 1000 x 530 50 TRHA510 TRHA510 ESD

End mesh panels NET2

Name Size W x D mm Set Code ESD
End mesh panel 604 x 364 Incl. 2 panels NET2
The mesh panels can be installed at the ends of the trolley or on the sides. An angle bracket is
set on the edge of the upper and lower shelf and the mesh is screwed into place. The 4-shelf
trolley can hold 2 mesh panels on top of each other.

Document holder DSA4

Name Size Code ESD
Document holder A4 DSA4 ESD
Semiconductive epoxy powder coated steel. Includes two magnets.

Low M-divider hoops LDH

Name Size Code
Divider hoops 460 x 315 LDH
Steplessly adjustable. 4 pcs per set. M-shape (the lowest point 105 mm from shelf). Suitable
only 430 mm deep shelves.

Low M-divider hoops LDH Document holder

114 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Reel holder trolley RRT

Reel holder trolley RRT

The adjustable reel holder trolley is compatible with SMD
reels, and suitable for transport and stocking of them. All
parts are powder coated steel, RAL 7035 ESD. The trolley
has four perforated steel shelves, 1090 x 460 x 28 mm. All
shelves are individually adjustable between 200-1605 mm.
3
The zinc plated reel racks that fit into the shelves are to be
ordered separately. The structure is light but sturdy. The end-
frames of the trolley are made of round, powder coated
steel tube (25 mm). Four turning castors with brakes (Ø 125
mm). The load capacity of one shelf is 50 kg, and the load
capacity of the trolley is 200 kg.

Reel holder trolley RRT

Name Size Max Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
1. Reel holder trolley 1100 x 530 x 1780 200 RRT ESD
2. Reel rack 960 x 426 x 254 50 RR ESD-Z
3. Document holder A4 DSA4 ESD

2 1

A B

In picture A: Side view of spools and reel racks. The capacity

of one rack is 30 fixed compartments for 7” spools of 60 mm
width.

In picture B: Side view of spools and reel racks. The capacity of

one rack is15 fixed compartments for 13” and 15” spools of
60 mm width.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 115

 TROLLEYS Mobile workstations

Mobile workstations
MLC mobile workstation is a light, ergonomic and easy-to-move
workstation. The mobile workstation moves and turns effortlessly even
in tight spaces. A laptop computer can be placed on the worktop or
underneath it, in which case only the screen is visible. A wide range
of accessories is available, with all the necessary supplies included.

• An ergonomic workstation that is light to move around - MLC mobile workstation

aluminium frame, steel legs
• Standard features include a laminated worktop and a
lockable computer compartment with holes for wires
• Four swivel castors (Ø125 mm), two with brakes

MLCT mobile height adjustable work surface is a compact sized

additional work surface with easy gas spring height adjustment. It
is ideal for tight spaces and tasks where easy manoeuvrability is a
must. Optimal for handling light loads and small sized objects. Ideal
also for laptop use. Suitable for technical and EPA environments
where easy ergonomics and mobility are required.
MLCT mobile height
• Easy to move around due to the light construction - aluminium adjustable work surface
frame, symmetric steel legs
• Accessories available: Accessory box underneath the table
top, accessories basket to the frame and a folder holder
• Four swivel castors (Ø100 mm), two with brakes

Mobile workstations
Name Size W x D mm Height mm* Top size mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
Mobile workstation 590 x 540 800-1200 520 x 370 x 25 12 MLC 405PG MLC 405PG ESD
Mobile height adjustable work surface 600 x 500 760-1185 580 x 490 x 25 25** MLCT 605PG MLCT 605PG ESD
*Height is adjusted by gas spring.
** 150 N gas spring lightens the load with app. 10 kg upon lifting.

Mobile workstation accessories

Name Description Suitability Code
1. Keyboard and mouse tray 210 x 620 mm. Equipped with a wrist support. MLC KH620N
2. Binder mount Fits a single 75 mm wide binder. MLC, MLCT FH1
3. Binder mount Fits three 75 mm wide binders. MLC, MLCT FH3
1
4. Accessories basket Blue bin, int. dim. 230 x 155 x 140 mm MLC, MLCT AB1930
5. LCD bracket Load capacity 15 kg, mounting holes 75 x 75 / 100 x 100 apart MLC MH
6. LCD support arm For the attachment of MH and MY supports. Max 22” screen. MLC MS
7. Tablet bracket For 7-10” tablets. Requires either an MH, MA or MA2 swivel arm. MLC MY
8. Accessory box With grey shelf bin 4020-3. MLCT AB4020-3
8. Accessory box ESD With ESD shelf bin 4020-4ESD. MLCT AB4020-4ESD 2

3 4 5 6 7 8

116 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Trolleys for additional workspace

Trolleys for additional workspace

Storage trolley is an easy solution for mobile storage, the storage

trolley has an adjustable middle shelf, and the shelves are fitted
with ESD or standard rubber mats.

SAP trolley provides extra workspace for the TP workbench.

Lower self, extra shelf and handle are available separately. Height
adjustment with allen key between 650-900 mm.

Concept trolley provides extra workspace for Concept and WB

workbenches. Lower shelf is integrated. Can be equipped with an
additional shelf or drawer unit 30 series. Height adjustment with
allen key between 650-900 mm.

Storage trolley

Trolleys for additional workspace

Name Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
Storage trolley 650 x 450 x 775 3 x 30 852 773-41 852 773-49
SAP trolley 700 x 500 150 SAP507 SAP507 ESD
SAP trolley 1000 x 700 150 SAP710 SAP710 ESD
Lower shelf for 700 x 500 40 AT507 AT507 ESD
SAP trolley
Lower shelf for 1000 x 700 40 AT710 AT710 ESD
SAP trolley
Extra shelf for 700 x 500 40 LT507 LT507 ESD
SAP trolley
Extra shelf for 1000 x 700 40 LT710 LT710 ESD SAP trolley with AT lower shelf, LT extra shelf and
SAP trolley PUSH handle
Handle for SAP trolley depth 500 PUSH50 PUSH50
Handle for SAP trolley depth 700 PUSH70 PUSH70
Concept trolley 500 x 700 x 150 CONT705-41 CONT705-49
650-900
Extra shelf for 400 x 500 25 CONTS504-49 CONTS504-49
Concept trolley
Drawer unit 30/15 300 x 454 x 150 10 859 330-49 859 330-49
Drawer unit 30/22 300 x 454 x 220 10 / 890 340-49 890 340-49
drawer
Drawer unit fastening set 890 653-49 890 653-49
All the light-duty trolleys are equipped with four swivel castors (ø 100 mm), two of which
have brakes.

Concept trolley, extra shelf and drawer unit 30/15

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 117

 TROLLEYS Packing trolleys

Packing trolleys
Low carton trolley LCT610
Trolley for large cartons. Three dividers can be assembled
crosswise or lengthwise. The fourth divider is a push handle.

Frame and shelf are of epoxy powder-coated steel in grey

RAL 7035. Four swivel castors (Ø 100 mm), two of which
have brakes. Shelf height above the ground 160 mm.

Size W x D x H mm Shelf size Max Code

W x D mm load kg
1080 x 630 x 1020 1000 x 630 150 LCT610

High carton trolley HCT410

Trolley for packing cartons. Shelves are equipped with
steplessly adjustable steel M-divider hoops. Larger hoop
height 540 mm, lowest point 330 mm above the shelf,
smaller hoop height 315 mm, lowest point 105 mm above
the shelf.

Frame and individually height adjustable shelves are of

epoxy powder-coated steel in grey RAL 7035. Four swivel
castors (Ø 100 mm), two of which have brakes.

Size W x D x H mm Shelf size Max Code

W x D mm load kg
1090 x 530 x 1515 1000 x 430 150 HCT410

Carton trolley
Name Description Size W x D x H mm Code
1. Castor Set Castor set for carton trolley. The castor set gives you a trolley from the SPM-shelf. 600 x 125 SPMCS-41
2. Shelf for packing material 600 mm deep shelf for many purposes. The shelf can also be equipped with 467 x 600 x 32 SPM500-49
PDH600 divider hoops. Max load 60 kg. 717 x 600 x 32 SPM750-49
870 x 600 x 32 SPM900-49
1167 x 600 x 32 SPM1200-49
1317 x 600 x 32 SPM1350-49
1467 x 600 x 32 SPM1500-49
1773 x 600 x 32 SPM1800-49
3. Divider hoops set (4 pcs), Divider hoop set for the SPM-shelves. Height 280 mm. The fixed divider is tightened 8 x 400 x 280 PDH600-49
SPM-shelf with the screw at the front edge of the shelf.

1 2 3

max
60
KG

118 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Packing trolleys

Industrial multi trolley frame with accessories

Name Description Module Size W x D x H mm Code

1. Industrial multi trolley Max load 300 kg. M750 790 x 760 x 1790 TMTFH7-41
frame M900 943 x 760 x 1790 TMTFH9-41
2. Shelf for packing material 600 mm deep shelf for many purposes. The shelf can also be equipped with 717 x 600 x 32 SPM750-49
PDH600 divider hoops. Max load 60 kg. 870 x 600 x 32 SPM900-49
3. Brackets for upright tube Mounting parts for top shelf to the upright tube. With the mounting kit, you attach SPMBS-49
SPM the SPM shelf to the upright tube.
4. Divider hoops set Divider hoop set (4 pcs) for the SPM-shelves. Height 280 mm. The fixed divider is 8 x 400 x 280 PDH600-49
SPM-shelf tightened with the screw at the front edge of the shelf.
5. Aluminium bin rail For auxiliary steel shelf, stacking and picking bins. Very sturdy. Max load 15 kg. M750 736 x 55 x 75 BP750C
M900 889 x 55 x 75 BP900C
6. Tablet bracket MY Tablet bracket for 7-10“ tablets. MY
LCD bracket MH The quick-release mechanism is equipped with the standard used flat-screen MH
mount 75 x 75 and 100 x 100 for the mounting of all normal flat screens.
Adapter set Adapter set for fixing LCD bracket MH to the upright tubes. 200 x 110 x 60 AS2
7. Auxiliary steel shelf Shelf for A4 paper and tape dispensers (max 2 pcs per shelf). Mounted on bin 217 x 298 x 20 ASSA4
profile. Max load 3 kg.
8. Roll holder set Roll holder set for packing material rolls. Max load 40 kg. M750 890 547-49P
M900 890 548-49P
9. Fixed tape dispenser Feeds tape from a roll; for a tape roll with a 76-mm socket. Includes screws to FTD50
fix the dispenser to ASSA4. Max roll Ø 120 mm and width 50 mm.
10. Basic label dispenser Feeds labels from a roll, space for several rolls. Fits on ASSA4 or can be placed in a shelf or BLD20
tray. Can be fixed with screws. Max roll Ø 220 mm and width 210 mm.
11. Document holder A4 Steel document holder fixed on upright tube. Easily adjustable with the double arm. Max load 5 kg. 928 49 008P
12. Equipment tray With double arm and handle. For small tools and packing accessories such as 500 x 250 x 125 928 49 002P
BLD20. Max load 15 kg.
Please visit our webpage for full range of module M750 and M900 accessories.

5 10 9
11
7

6
Recycling material trolley PRMT
The recycling trolleys are ideal for placing underneath or
beside the packing bench. The bins are adjustable in angle 12
8
for ease of use! The trolley comes with four swivel castors,
two with brakes. Available in single and double version.

4
Size W x D x H mm Code
350 x 625 x 765 PRMT 1
680 x 625 x 765 PRMT 2

3 2

Industrial multi trolley frame

with accessories

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 119

 TROLLEYS Heavy-duty trolley

Heavy-duty trolley
Heavy-duty trolleys, as their name indicates, are ideal for moving heavy loads. Their special castors support extremely heavy
weights. The total capacity of the basic model is up to 600 kg!

The heavy-duty trolleys are equipped with two fixed castors (Ø 100 mm) and two swivel castors with brakes.
880

880
78 78
5 5
935 935

Heavy-duty trolley 1, code C 750 41 001 Heavy-duty trolley 2, code C 750 41 002

Heavy-duty trolleys Heavy-duty trolley accessories

Name Size Max Code Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg W x D x H mm load kg
Heavy-duty trolley 1 935 x 785 x 830 600 C 750 41 001 Shelf 812 x 770 x 30 400 852 671-49
Heavy-duty trolley 2 935 x 785 x 830 600 C 750 41 002

Heavy-duty trolley 3, code C 750 07 103

Qty Name Size mm Code

1 Bottom shelf 933 x 780 852 666-49

1 Perforated uprights, pair 661 852 668-49
1 Perforated uprights, pair 1359 852 667-49
1 Cross support, pair 852 669-49
1 Handle 852 670-49
1 Pvc-top, steel edges 1000 x 750 836 723-79
1640

1 Corner hooks 848 336-49

1 Horizontal tube M900 873 840 104-49
2 Fixed castors Ø100 1988
2 Swivel castors Ø100 1987
1 Perforated panel 870 x 389 861 516-49
1 Suspension rail M900 895 859 152-49
6 Plastic box 1525-5 1525-5
81
1 Fixing set 870 811-00 0
1 Drawer unit 55/37 550 x 715 x 370 611 07 001 1000

Heavy-duty trolley 3, code C 750 07 103

Size 1000 x 810 x 1590 mm
Top 1000 x 750 mm
Worktop height 850 mm

120 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Fitter’s trolley

Fitter’s trolley
A fitter’s trolley lets you take your supplies and tools wherever you go, while keeping
them organised. Rubber mats and ESD-mats for shelves available separately.

The fitter’s trolleys are equipped with four swivel castors (Ø 125 mm), two of
which have brakes. Fitter’s trolley can be combined with all M750 accessories.

Fitter’s trolleys
Fitter’s trolley 1
Name Module Size Max Code Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
Fitter’s trolley 1 M750 790 x 760 x 875 300 C730 41 001 C730 49 001
Fitter’s trolley 2 M750 790 x 760 x 875 300 C730 41 002 C730 49 002
Fitter’s trolley 3 M750 790 x 760 x 875 300 C730 41 003 -
Fitter’s trolley, frame M750 790 x 760 x 875 300 C730 41 000 C730 49 000

Fitter’s trolley accessories

Name Module Size Max Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
Lower shelf M750 x 728 M750 710 x 728 x 33 100 TMTLS7-49
Steel shelf M750 x 650 + brackets M750 718 x 650 x 33 100 TMTS7-49
Adjustable shelf M750 x 650 M750 718 x 650 x 37 100 TMTAS7-49
Adjustable shelf M750 x 650, M750 718 x 650 x 37 50 TMTSAS7-49 Fitter’s trolley 2
stepless depth adjustment
Fitter’s trolleys can be combined with M750 accessories.

Mats for shelves

Suitability Module Size Code Code ESD
W x D mm
Lower shelf TMTLS7-49 M750 705 x 723 725739-00 725747-00
Steel shelf TMTS7-49 M750 713 x 645 725735-00 725743-00
Adjustable shelf TMTAS7-49 and M750 678 x 600 860548-00 860318-00
TMTSAS7-49

Fitter’s trolley 3
Fitter´s trolley 3 includes 6 cone racks. Tool
holders, page 168, ordered separately.
875

760
Ø125
790
Fitter’s trolley frame

Cone rack M750 for tool holders HSK, Capto, ISO

Name Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code
Cone rack M750 742 x 206 x 95 50 890 729-49
See tool holders on page 168.

Cone rack M750

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 121

 TROLLEYS Service trolley

Service trolley
The service trolley frame is equipped with a safety locking feature that
allows only one drawer to be opened at a time. The cover comes as
standard with a separate rubber mat that prevents items from slipping.

Both sides of the trolley have standard, perforated panels that you
can accessorise with brackets and mountings, to suit any application.
Service trolleys are also equipped with two fixed castors (Ø 150 mm)
and two swivel castors including brakes (Ø 100 mm).

+ Service trolley
Customise your service trolley with a selection of hooks Size 710 x 480 x 875 mm
from page 176. Max load 300 kg

Service trolleys
Model Service trolley 1 Service trolley 2 Service trolley 3 Service trolley 4 Service trolley 5 Service trolley 6 Service trolley 7 Service trolley 8
Code 710 07 001 710 07 002 710 07 003 710 07 004 710 07 005 710 07 006 710 07 007 710 07 008
Height (mm) 3 x 75 2 x 75 1 x 75 5 x 75 2 x 75 1 x 100 1 x 100 1 x 100
of the drawer

1 x 125 2 x 100 4 x 100 1 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 250 2 x 125 4 x 125

1 x 250 2 x 125 1 x 125 1 x 125 1 x 250 1 x 250

Internal drawer dimensions: 600 x 345 x 63/88/113/238 mm. Drawers open 90% and loading capacity is 50 kg/drawer.

122 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Service trolley

Accessorised service trolley

By attaching the upright tube pair 30 x 30 mm (code 854 038-
49), you can use all the M500 acessories.

Accessories for service trolley (in the picture)

Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Perforated upright pair 30 x 30 x 1219 854 038-49
1 Perforated tool cabinet 470 x 200 x 600 854 039-07
1 Suspension rail M500 860 953-49
5 Plastic container 30-1L-6
1 Vice support 854 037-45
1 Pick-up box holder 165 x 48 x 456 854 042-49
4 Pick-up box 149 x 85 x 48 851 843-00
1 Utility box 155 x 90 x 410 854 041-49
1 Paper roll dispenser* 854 043-49
1 Waste bucket holder* 854 044-49
1 Waste bucket 839 159-00
1 Folder compartment 466 x 90 x 240 854 040-49
*Fixing to perforated panel

Drawer interiors for service trolley

Rubber mat for the

Tool troughs 45 and 70 mm Middle dividers and plates 2 Pick up boxes drawer bottom
Drawer 71/75 854 066-00 3 x middle divider, 6 x middle plate Drawer 71/75 854 064-00 Rubber mat 71 854 078-00
6 x 45 mm, 4 x 70 mm 150 and 2 x middle plate 300* Includes 16 pick-up boxes with
Drawer 71/75 854 069-49 dividers.
Drawer 71/100 854 070-49
Drawer 71/125 854 070-49

* One example of interior solutions shown in picture.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 123

 TROLLEYS Stacking bin trolley

Stacking bin trolley

A storage system for stores, production facilities and

warehouses. It is easily moved to wherever it is needed. You
can configure the trolley to match your needs.

• Double-sided trolley for stacking bins

• Powder-coated (light grey, RAL 7035), steel-frame trolley with
a fixed bottom shelf
• Up to 112 stacking bins can be attached to one trolley, must
be ordered separately
• Four different sizes of stacking bins to choose from
• Height adjustable ergonomic push handle
• Sixteen step-by-step height adjustable bin rails, eight bin rails
per side, length of bin rails 742 mm
• Height of the bin rails can be adjusted easily without tools
• Four swivel castors (Ø 100 mm), two with brakes
• Module M750, all the upright tube accessories are available

Trolley BT-170B
Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
790 x 760 x 1770 300* BT-170B BT-170B ESD
*Load capacity for bin rail 50 kg

Suitable stacking bins

Code Quantity/rail Max. quantity/trolley
1015 7 pcs 112 pcs
1520 5 pcs 80 pcs
1525 5 pcs 80 pcs
1930 4 pcs 64 pcs
Details of stacking bins can be found on page 194.

1 x trolley BT-170B
40 x blue stacking bin 1520-6
32 x blue stacking bin 1930-6
+ Add accessories as needed!
Accessories starting from page 55. All module M750 accessories suit
stacking bin trolley.

Bottle holder Ø 100

Equipment tray Tool panel

124 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 TROLLEYS Cabinet trolley

Cabinet trolley for

small-parts storage cabinets
This assembly holds 8 cabinets, which must be ordered separately.
This double sided trolley has 4 swivel castors (Ø 100 mm), two
of which have brakes. One steel bottom shelf comes as standard.
Height-adjustable ergonomic push handle makes the trolley easy
to move.

Powder-coated (light grey, RAL 7035) steel frame with a fixed

bottom shelf. Height of the fixing rails can be adjusted easily
without tools. Module M750, all the upright tube accessories are
available for cabinet trolley.

Trolley BT-550B
Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
790 x 760 x 1770 300 BT-550B BT-550B ESD
Maximum eight small-parts cabinets, 4 on each side, to be ordered separately.

Suitable small-parts storage cabinets

Code Includes small Small drawer dimensions
drawers WxDxH
550-3 L-00 (60 pcs) 55 x 175 x 37
551-3 L-01 (48 pcs) 69 x 175 x 37
551-4ESD L-61-4ESD (48 pcs) 69 x 170 x 40
552-3 L-02 (24 pcs) 138 x 175 x 37
554-3 L-04 (24 pcs) 92 x 175 x 59
554-4ESD L-64-4ESD (24 pcs) 92 x 170 x 62
556-3 L-06 (8 pcs) 277 x 175 x 59
557-3 L-07 (12 pcs) 138 x 175 x 81
L-01 (24 pcs) 69 x 175 x 37
550C-3 L-04 (6 pcs) 92 x 175 x 59
L-06 (2 pcs) 277 x 175 x 59
Details of series 550 can be found on page 184.

1 x trolley BT-550B
8 x small-parts storage cabinets 551-4ESD

+
Add accessories as needed!
Here are some examples of accessories suitable for trolley BT-550B.
See page 55 for full range of module M750 accessories.

Tablet bracket Document holder A4

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 125

 6. Drawer units

126 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 Versatile drawer units

We provide a comprehensive range of different drawer units for a variety of purposes. You can fix any drawer unit
from the same series under a worktop or on a plinth, or equip them with castors to take along to your next workstation.

Efficient storage and control

Our drawer units are great for storing tools and supplies. It
is surprising how much time is spent finding tools and other
items if they are not stored systematically. The versatile inte-
rior combinations of our drawer units guarantee that your
supplies are always at hand and in good order.

A comprehensive range of drawer units

We promise that you will find a drawer unit that meets your
requirements in our comprehensive range. You can choose
from several different heights and drawer and interior com-
binations. We have selected some combinations for this
brochure. For more options, please contact: sales@treston.
com.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 127

 DRAWER UNITS Light steel cabinet LMC

Light steel cabinet LMC

These steel cabinets are an ideal way of providing individual secure storage for your staff. Drawers are mounted on telescopic
ball race slides. Four cabinet sizes, including one drawer/cupboard combination. The cabinet frames are epoxy powder coated
steel; drawer fronts are composite board with aluminium handles. Colour light grey, RAL 7035. Mount on benches with brackets
(included).

Suitable for WB/TP/TPB

workbenches and
SAP/WTR trolleys

Light steel cabinet, load capacity 15 kg/drawer, 70 % opening

Code LMC01 LMC02 LMC04 LMC04D
Code ESD LMC01 ESD LMC02 ESD LMC04 ESD LMC04D ESD
Outer dims W x D x H mm 370 x 460 x 135 370 x 460 x 245 370 x 460 x 455 370 x 460 x 455
Includes drawers 1 x 100 2 x 100 4 x 100 1 x 100 + cupboard, height
(outer height mm) 300 mm, open to right
Internal drawer dimensions: 278 x 438 x 75 mm

Cover LMCK2
Description Code
Needed for mounting cabinets to WB benches and WTR trolley. LMCK2

128 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 30 and 35

Drawer units 30 and 35

These drawer units are fastened under a workbench to provide storage space. Choose from single drawer, two drawers or
drawer cabinet. If additional drawers are needed, they can be easily attached to each other. The drawers can be locked to
protect the contents.

Drawer cabinet 35/47 is suitable

for storing upright folders.

Drawer units 30 and 35, load capacity 10 kg/drawer, 80 % opening

30/15 30/22 35/47
Code 859 330-49 859 340-49 860 972-49
Outer dims W x D x H mm 300 x 454 x 150 300 x 454 x 220 350 x 470 x 470
Includes drawers 1 x 150 2 x 110 1 x 110
(outer height mm) + cupboard , height

Internal drawer dimensions: 255 x 400 x 120 mm 255 x 400 x 75 mm 300 x 400 x 70 mm

Fastening sets for drawer unit 30 and 35 (should be selected according to the type of the workbench)
Depth 600 mm 700 mm 750 mm 800 mm 900 mm
Concept, allen key adjustable 890 653-49 - 890 653-49 - 890 653-49
Concept, hand crank adjustable - 890 653-49 890 653-49
Concept, motor adjustable - - 854 463-49 - 854 463-49
TED - - - 855 057-49 -
TP / TPH / TPB - 855 054-49 - - 855 054-49
WB - - - 855 054-49 -
Not adapted to Concept handcrank and motor adjustable bench (depth 600 mm).

Drawer unit 30/22 is also available with a secure and up-to-date electronic code lock.

This electronic locking system replaces keys with a

numerical code. The code is easy to change when
needed, for example, for a different user and thus this
drawer unit is an excellent choice when high conveni-
ence and confidentiality are needed.

The locking system is operated with 2 x AAA batteries

and is thus independent from an external power sup-
ply. Due to an automatic low power (sleep) mode, the
batteries last long, and even when the battery power
is low, the lock can still be opened 300 more times.

Drawer unit 30/22 with electronic code lock,

order code 720010-49.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 129

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 45

Drawer unit 45
Centrally locked high quality steel drawer units for storage of with 100 % opening of the drawers. Load-bearing capacity
tools and small components. Mounted under workbenches is 60 kg per drawer. Our drawer units are suitable for use
with brackets. Also available with castors as a trolley version. in EPAs. The mobile trolleys are available in both ESD and
Drawer units are epoxy powder coated in grey, RAL 7035. non- ESD versions. New drawer divider sets are available
Central locking. Full width drawer handle in anodised for functional and organized storage space (p. 133).
aluminium. Smooth and quiet telescopic ball-race runners

Drawer units 45/14 and 45/26

Opening Load capacity Outer dims Height (mm) Code
Model kg / drawer W x D x H mm of the drawer
45/14-1 100% 60 450 x 520 x140 1 x 100 603 49 001
45/26-1 100% 60 450 x 520 x 260 2 x 100 604 49 001
Internal drawer dimensions: 380 x 500 x 90 mm.
45/56: 560 mm
45/66: 660 mm

45/56: 700 mm
45/66: 800 mm

45/56: 660 mm
45/66: 760 mm
52
0
mm

450 mm

Choose the drawer unit according to Load capacity 150 kg, 4 swivel castors
your needs; with castors, plinth or no (ø 100 mm), 2 with brakes. The trolley
plinth. version comes with a rubber mat that
stops items from sliding on the surface.

The maximum
Combination name load capacity of
100% opening
45/56-1 drawers is
60 kg!
Width Height Version

Drawer unit 45/56, 100% opening, load capacity 60 kg/drawer

45/56-1 45/56-2 45/56-3 45/56-4 45/56-7 45/56-10 45/56-11
Standard, frame height 560 mm 606 49 101 606 49 102 606 49 103 606 49 104 606 49 107 606 49 110 606 49 111
With plinth, frame height 660 mm 606 49 201 606 49 202 606 49 203 606 49 204 606 49 207 606 49 210 606 49 211
With castors, frame height 700 mm 606 49 301 606 49 302 606 49 303 606 49 304 606 49 307 - -
Height (mm) of the drawer 5 x 100 2 x 100 3 x 100 1 x 100 2 x 150 2 x 100 1 x 200

2 x 150 1 x 200 2 x 200 1 x 200 1 x 300 1 x 300

130 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 45

Drawer unit 45/66, 100% opening, load capacity 60 kg/drawer

45/66-1 45/66-2 45/66-3 45/66-4 45/66-5 45/66-6 45/66-7
Standard, frame height 660 mm 607 49 101 607 49 102 607 49 103 607 49 104 607 49 105 607 49 106 607 49 107
With plinth, frame height 760 mm 607 49 201 607 49 202 607 49 203 607 49 204 607 49 205 607 49 206 607 49 207
With castors, frame height 800 mm 607 49 301 607 49 302 607 49 303 607 49 304 607 49 305 607 49 306 607 49 307
Height (mm) of the drawer 6 x 100 3 x 100 1 x 100 4 x 150 4 x 100 2 x 100 3 x 200

2 x 150 2 x 150 1 x 200 2 x 200

1 x 200

Drawer unit 45/66, 100% opening, load capacity 60 kg/drawer

45/66-12 45/66-13 45/66-14 45/66-15 Internal drawer dimensions mm
Standard, frame height 660 mm 607 49 112 607 49 113 607 49 114 607 49 115 Width 380 Depth 500
With plinth, frame height 760 mm 607 49 212 607 49 213 607 49 214 607 49 215 Outer height mm Inner height mm
Height (mm) of the drawer 3 x 100 2 x 150 1 x 100 2 x 300 100 90
150 140
200 190
1 x 300 1 x 300 1 x 200 300 290

1 x 300

Drawer units with castors are also available as non ESD-versions

! (code 41 instead of 49).

Cabinet 45/56, door right Cabinet 45/56, door left

45/66: 660 mm
45/56: 560 mm

w/o lock with lock w/o lock with lock

Standard 606 49 105 606 49 108 Standard 606 49 106 606 49 109
With plinth 606 49 205 606 49 208 With plinth 606 49 206 606 49 209
With castors 606 49 305 606 49 308 With castors 606 49 306 606 49 309

Cabinets include one bottom shelf and one adjustable shelf, shelf load capacity 50 kg.

Drawer cabinet 45/66, door right Drawer cabinet 45/66, door left
drawer 1 x 100 w/o lock with lock drawer 1 x 100 w/o lock with lock
45/66: 800 mm
45/56: 700 mm

Standard 607 49 108 607 49 110 Standard 607 49 109 607 49 111
With plinth 607 49 208 607 49 210 With plinth 607 49 209 607 49 211
With castors 607 49 308 607 49 310 With castors 607 49 309 607 49 311

Cabinets include one bottom shelf and one adjustable shelf, shelf load capacity 50 kg.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 131

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 45

Fastening sets for drawer unit 45 (should be selected according to the type of the workbench)
Depth 600 mm 700 mm 750 mm 800 mm 900 mm
Concept, allen key adjustable 890 653-49 - 890 653-49 - 890 653-49
Concept, hand crank adjustable - 890 653-49 890 653-49
Concept, motor adjustable - - 854 463-49 - 854 463-49
TP / TPH - 855 055-49* - - 855 055-49*
WB - - - 855 055-49* -
Not adapted to Concept handcrank and motor adjustable bench (depth 600 mm).
* Standard drawer unit models include fastening set. For drawer unit models with plinth the fastening set 855 055-49 is available only upon order.
For heavy loads we recommend adding a plinth or castors to the drawer unit.

Cover
Description Code
Needed for mounting drawer unit 45 to WB benches. 855 060-49

Pencil box
Description Code
Add a pencil box in the drawer to organise small items more efficiently. 854 850-49
Cannot be used together with the drawer divider sets.

Hanging file support for 45/300 drawer

Size (inner) W x D x H mm Code
327 x 492 x 150 W872245-49

The maximum
load capacity of
100% opening
drawers is
60 kg!

132 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 45

Drawer interiors
Divider set 1
Model Code
Drawer 45/100 872991-49
Drawer 45/ 150 and 45/200 872996-49
4 x horizontal dividers 375

Divider set 2
Model Code
Drawer 45/100 872992-49
Drawer 45/ 150 and 45/200 872997-49
1 x vertical divider, 8 x divider plate 185

Divider set 3
Model Code
Drawer 45/100 872993-49
Drawer 45/ 150 and 45/200 872998-49
1 x vertical divider, 4 x divider plate 125, 4 x divider plate 250

Divider set 4
Model Code
Drawer 45/100 872994-49
Drawer 45/ 150 and 45/200 872999-49
2 x vertical divider, 12 x divider plate 125

+
For additional divider parts see page 201.

Drawer units with castors are also available as non ESD-versions (code 41 instead of 49).

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 133

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 55

Drawer unit 55

Choose the drawer unit according to your needs;

with castors, base or no base.

795 mm

800 mm
370 mm
130 mm
71
5

550 mm
mm

550 mm 550 mm 550 mm

Trolley model: load capacity 300 kg, 2 fixed castors,

2 swivel castors with brakes (ø 100 mm).

With these heavy-duty drawer units you can optimise your The units with plinth can also be used workbench legs
storage and keep all your items perfectly organised. The and the smaller drawers are easily fastened under a work-
safety locking prevents other drawers from opening while bench. The 66-cm-high drawer unit includes optional cas-
one drawer is open (always lock the drawers during trans- tors, making it an excellent choice for a mobile workstation.
port). You can choose the best option from three heights The unit with castors comes with a rubber mat that stops
to meet your needs, or add height or width with different items from sliding on the surface. The version with doors is
drawer unit combinations. ideal for storing larger items. The 50 mm high drawer is fully
opening with a load capacity of 40 kg. The other drawers
open 85% with a load capacity of 80 kg.

Configure your drawer

• Select the drawer unit frame (standard, The maximum

with base or with castors) load capacity of
85% opening
• Select the drawer units for the frame drawers is
80 kg!

Drawer unit 55/66 with base is also available with top and rubber mat. Use
! code W854113-41 together with the drawer unit code to order.

134 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 55

Drawer unit 55/13 and 55/37

Model 55/13-1 55/37-1 55/37-2 55/37-3 55/37-4 55/37-5 55/37-6 55/37-7
Code 610 07 001 611 07 001 611 07 002 611 07 003 611 07 004 611 07 005 611 07 006 611 07 007
Height (mm) of 1 x 100 1 x 50 3 x 100 2 x 150 3 x 50 1 x 50 2 x 50 6 x 50
the drawer

1 x 100 1 x 150 1 x 250 2 x 100

1 x 150

Drawer unit 55/66

55/66-1 55/66-2 55/66-3 55/66-4 55/66-5 55/66-8 55/66-9 55/66-10
Standard 612 07 101 612 07 102 612 07 103 612 07 104 612 07 105 612 07 108 612 07 109 612 07 110
With base 612 07 201 612 07 202 612 07 203 612 07 204 612 07 205 612 07 208 612 07 209 612 07 210
With castors 612 07 301 612 07 302 612 07 303 612 07 304 612 07 305 612 07 308 612 07 309 612 07 310
Height (mm) of 3 x 50 2 x 50 1 x 50 2 x 50 1 x 50 3 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 50
the drawer

3 x 100 2 x 100 4 x 100 1 x 100 3 x 100 2 x 150 1 x 150 5 x 100

1 x 150 2 x 150 1 x 150 1 x 150 1 x 250 1 x 250

1 x 250

55/66-11 55/66-13 55/66-14 55/66-15 55/66-16 55/66-17 55/66-18 55/66-19

Standard 612 07 111 612 07 113 612 07 114 612 07 115 612 07 116 612 07 117 612 07 118 612 07 119
With base 612 07 211 612 07 213 612 07 214 612 07 215 612 07 216 612 07 217 612 07 218 612 07 219
With castors 612 07 311 612 07 313 612 07 314 612 07 315 612 07 316 612 07 317 612 07 318 612 07 319
Height (mm) of 1 x 100 4 x 50 4 x 150 6 x 100 1 x 50 12 x 50 5 x 50 6 x 50
the drawer

2 x 250 1 x 100 2 x 150 1 x 100 3 x 100

2 x 150 1 x 250 1 x 250

55/66-20 55/66-21
Standard 612 07 120 612 07 121
Drawer unit 55/66-6 with door
With base 612 07 220 612 07 221
Door right Door left
With castors 612 07 320 612 07 321
Standard 612 07 106 612 07 107
Height (mm) of the 8 x 50 2 x 50
With base 612 07 206 612 07 207
drawer
With castors 612 07 306 612 07 307
2 x 100 2 x 250 Cabinets include bottom shelf.

Shelves for drawer unit 55/66 with door

Internal drawer dimensions mm Name Size mm Max load kg Code
Width 460 Depth 612 Pull-out shelf 455 x 612 x 61 80 854 106-49
Outer height mm Inner height mm Shelf 540 x 629 x 35 80 854 114-49
50 35
100 85
150 135
Fastening set for drawer unit 55
250 235
Description Code
With fastening set drawer unit 55 can be fastened on 900 x1800 mm TP 855 056-49
and TPH benches.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 135

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 55

Drawer interiors

Divider Set 1
Model Code
55/100 873 001-49
55/150&250 873 006-49
3 dividers, 12 middleplates (9x100, 3x150)

Divider Set 2
Model Code
55/100 873 002-49
55/150&250 873 007-49
2 dividers, 9 middle plates (9x150)

Divider Set 3
Model Code
55/100 873 003-49
55/150&250 873 008-49
1 divider, 5 middle plates (3x150, 2x300)

Tool troughs 33, 45 and 70 mm

Model Code
Drawer 55/50 834 122-00
4 x33 mm, 3 x 45 mm, 2 x 70 mm

Pick up boxes
Model Code
Drawer 55/100 851 866-00
Includes 21 pick-up boxes with dividers.

Rubber mat for the drawer bottom

Model Code
Rubber mat 55 852 717-00

One example of interior solutions shown in picture.

+
For additional divider parts see page 201.

136 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer unit 55

Drawer unit 55 combinations

It is possible to combine two drawer unit 55 frames with the help of a TWIN set (combination 3). The middle plate can be
used to stack two drawer units 55 (combinations 1 and 2).

Combination 1, Code C 612 07 901

Includes Code
55/66-4 612 07 304
55/37-1 611 07 001
Middle plate 854 103-49

Combination 2, Code C 612 07 902

Includes Code
55/66-6 612 07 306
55/37-1 611 07 001
Middle plate 854 103-49 1 2
Shelf + brackets 854 114-49

Combination 3, Code C 612 07 905

Includes Code
55/66-4 612 07 204
55/37-1 611 07 001
Middle plate 854 103-49

Combination 4, Code C 612 07 906

Includes Code
55/66-6 612 07 206
55/37-1 611 07 001
3 4
Middle plate 854 103-49
Shelf + brackets 854 114-49

Combination 5, Code C 612 07 903

Includes Size mm Code
55/66-4 612 07 104
55/66-6 612 07 106
Twin set 854 108-41
Shelf + brackets 854 114-49
Bench top 1200 x 750 110 995-79
5

TWIN set
Name Size mm Code
Twin set 854 108-41
Bench top 1200 x 750 110 995-79
The Twin set includes four swivel castors Ø100 mm, two of which have brakes
and plates to fix two frames together. The top is not included in the pack.

Always remember
to lock the
Middle plate
Name Code Note! Drawers have separate locks. drawer unit
Middle plate 854 103-49
Serialization can be ordered. during transport!

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 137

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 71

Drawer unit 71
Less than 50 cm deep, this drawer unit is ideal for use in narrow
spaces, such as in vehicles. The units come with a rubber mat that
stops items from sliding on the surface. The drawers have ball
bearing runners and safety locking which prevents other drawers

790 mm
from opening while one drawer is open.

This same drawer unit is used in the service trolley with castors p.
48. The drawers are opening 90% and their load capacity is 50
kg.

48
0m
m
710 mm

Drawer unit 71/79

Model 71/79-1 71/79-2 71/79-3 71/79-4 71/79-5 71/79-6 71/79-7 71/79-8
Code 620 07 001 620 07 002 620 07 003 620 07 004 620 07 005 620 07 006 620 07 007 620 07 008
Height (mm) 3 x 75 2 x 75 1 x 75 5 x 75 2 x 75 1 x 100 1 x 100 1 x 100
of the drawer

1 x 125 2 x 100 4 x 100 1 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 250 2 x 125 4 x 125

1 x 250 2 x 125 1 x 125 1 x 125 1 x 250 1 x 250

Internal drawer dimensions: 600 x 345 x 63/88/113/238 mm.

Drawer interiors
Tool troughs 45 and 70 mm
Name Code
Drawer 71/75 854 066-00
6 x 45 mm, 4 x 70 mm

Pick up boxes
Name Code
Drawer 71/75 854 064-00
Includes 16 pick-up boxes with dividers. * One example of interior
solutions shown in picture.

Middle dividers and plates 2

Name Code
3 x middle divider, 6 x middle plate 150 and 2 x middle plate 300*
Drawer 71/75 854 069-49
Drawer 71/100 854 070-49
Drawer 71/125 854 070-49

Rubber mat for the drawer bottom +

Name Code For additional divider parts see page 201.
Rubber mat 71 854 078-00

138 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 70, 90 and 130

Drawer units 70, 90 and 130

70 90 130

1400 mm
1400 mm
1400 mm
1100 mm
1100 mm

1100 mm
715
71

71
5m
5m

1330 mm

m
m 910 mm

m
715 mm
m

You can fit an amazing number of things in these spacious The safety locking prevents other drawers from opening
drawer units. Choose the one that best meets your needs while one drawer is open. The drawer unit can be moved
from two heights: 110 and 140 cm. The 110-cm-high with a pallet truck or a forklift when the base front plate has
drawer units include a cover that doubles as a worktop been removed. The drawers are fully opening and their
with a rubber mat. load capacity is up to 200 kg.

All the drawers are fully opening, also available with a load capacity of up to 200 kg!

The drawer units 70, 90 and 130 all have fully open-
ing drawers. The load capacity of the standard draw-
ers is 75 kg, but all the drawer units are available with
drawers that have a load capacity of 200 kg!

The drawer units with the load capacity of 200 kg are

indicated by a product code having an H in the end
(e.g. 613 07 001 H).

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 139

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 70

Drawer unit 70

Drawers open
100% and their
load capacity is
75 kg or 200 kg.
1400 mm
1100 mm

The drawer units 70, 90 and

71
130 can be moved with a
5m pallet truck or a forklift when
m
715 mm the base front plate has been
removed.

Drawer unit 70/110, 100% opening

Model 70/110-1 70/110-2 70/110-3 70/110-4 70/110-12 70/110-13 70/110-20 70/110-21
Code (75 kg) 613 07 001 613 07 002 613 07 003 613 07 004 613 07 012 613 07 013 613 07 020 613 07 021
Code (200 kg)* 613 07 001 H 613 07 002 H 613 07 003 H 613 07 004 H 613 07 012 H 613 07 013 H 613 07 020 H 613 07 021 H
Height (mm) 2 x 100 2 x 75 9 x 100 2 x 75 2 x 75 6 x 100 8 x 75 1 x 150
of the drawer

3 x 150 3 x 100 2 x 100 6 x 100 2 x 150 3 x 100 3 x 250

1 x 250 3 x 150 2 x 150 1 x 150

1 x 250

Model 70/110-32 70/110-33 70/110-34 70/110-43 70/110-44 70/110-45 70/110-46

Code (75 kg) 613 07 032 613 07 033 613 07 034 613 07 043 613 07 044 613 07 045 613 07 046
Code (200 kg)* 613 07 032 H 613 07 033 H 613 07 034 H 613 07 043 H 613 07 044 H 613 07 045 H 613 07 046 H
Height (mm) 12 x 75 1 x 100 6 x 150 2 x 75 3 x 100 4 x 100 8 x 75
of the drawer

2 x 150 3 x 250 4 x 150 2 x 250 2 x 150

2 x 250

140 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 70

Drawer unit 70/140, 100% opening

Model 70/140-1 70/140-2 70/140-3 70/140-4 70/140-14 70/140-19 70/140-20 70/140-23
Code (75 kg) 616 07 001 616 07 002 616 07 003 616 07 004 616 07 014 616 07 019 616 07 020 616 07 023
Code (200 kg)* 616 07 001 H 616 07 002 H 616 07 003 H 616 07 004 H 616 07 014 H 616 07 019 H 616 07 020 H 616 07 023 H
Height (mm) 2 x 75 2 x 75 4 x 100 4 x 75 6 x 100 16 x 75 3 x 100 8 x 100
of the drawer

5 x 100 6 x 100 2 x 150 2 x 100 4 x 150 6 x 150 1 x 150

2 x 150 3 x 150 2 x 250 3 x150 1 x 250

1 x 250 1 x 250

Model 70/140-24 70/140-26 70/140-28 70/140-31 70/140-34 70/140-35 70/140-36 70/140-37

Code (75 kg) 616 07 024 616 07 026 616 07 028 616 07 031 616 07 034 616 07 035 616 07 036 616 07 037
Code (200 kg)* 616 07 024 H 616 07 026 H 616 07 028 H 616 07 031 H 616 07 034 H 616 07 035 H 616 07 036 H 616 07 037 H
Height (mm) 12 x 100 10 x 75 6 x 75 9 x 100 8 x 150 8 x 75 6 x 75 2 x 75
of the drawer

3 x 100 3 x 100 2 x 150 6 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 150

1 x 150 3 x 150 2 x 150 3 x 250

1 x 250

Model 70/140-38 70/140-39 70/140-40

Code (75 kg) 616 07 038 616 07 039 616 07 040
Code (200 kg)* 616 07 038 H 616 07 039 H 616 07 040 H
Height (mm) 2 x 100 12 x 75 12 x 75
of the drawer
4 x 250 2 x 150 3 x 100

Internal drawer dimensions mm

Width 612 Depth 612
Outer height mm Inner height mm
75 60
100 85
150 135
250 235

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 141

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 70

Drawer interiors

Tool troughs 33 and 45 mm

Name Code
Drawer 70/50 837 911-00
Drawer 70/75 837 911-00
8 x 33 mm, 6 x 45 mm

Tool troughs 45 and 70 mm

Name Code
Drawer 70/50 837 938-00
Drawer 70/75 837 938-00
6 x 45 mm, 4 x 70 mm

Pick up boxes
Name Code
Drawer 70/75 851 867-00
Includes 28 pick-up boxes with dividers.

Divider Set 1
Name Code
70/75 873 011-49
70/100 873 021-49
70/150 & 250 873 031-49
5 dividers, 18 middle plates (18x100)

Divider Set 2
Name Code
70/75 873 012-49
70/100 873 022-49
70/150 & 250 873 032-49
3 dividers, 12 middle plates (12x150)

Divider Set 3
Name Code
70/75 873 013-49
70/100 873 023-49
70/150 & 250 873 033-49
1 divider, 4 middle plates (4x300)

* One example of interior solutions shown in picture.

142 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 70

Divider Set 4
Name Code
70/75 873 014-49
70/100 873 024-49
70/150 & 250 873 034-49
4 dividers, 15 middle plates (9x100, 6x150)

Divider Set 5
Name Code
70/75 873 015-49
70/100 873 025-49
70/150&250 873 035-49
2 dividers, 8 middle plates (6x150, 2x300)

Divider Set 6
Name Code
70/75 873 016-49
70/100 873 026-49
70/150&250 873 036-49
3 dividers, 11 middle plates (9x100, 2x300)

Rubber mat for the drawer bottom

Name Code
Rubber mat 70 852 718-00

+
For additional divider parts see page 201.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 143

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 90

Drawer unit 90

Drawers open
100% and their
load capacity is

1100 mm
1400 mm 75 kg or 200 kg.

Easy to move with pallet

71

truck or fork lift.

5m
m

910 mm

Drawer unit 90/110, 100% opening

Model 90/110-1 90/110-2 90/110-3 90/110-4 90/110-13 90/110-20 90/110-21 90/110-33
Code (75 kg) 614 07 001 614 07 002 614 07 003 614 07 004 614 07 013 614 07 020 614 07 021 614 07 033
Code (200 kg) 614 07 001 H 614 07 002 H 614 07 003 H 614 07 004 H 614 07 013 H 614 07 020 H 614 07 021 H 614 07 033 H
Height (mm) 2 x 100 2 x 75 9 x 100 2 x 75 6 x 100 8 x 75 1 x 150 1 x 100
of the drawer

3 x 150 3 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 150 3 x 100 3 x 250 2 x 150

1 x 250 3 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 250

1 x 250

Model 90/110-34 90/110-43 90/110-44 90/110-45 90/110-46

Code (75 kg) 614 07 034 614 07 043 614 07 044 614 07 045 614 07 046
Code (200 kg) 614 07 034 H 614 07 043 H 614 07 044 H 614 07 045 H 614 07 046 H
Height (mm) 6 x 150 2 x 75 3 x 100 4 x 100 8 x 75
of the drawer

3 x 250 4 x 150 2 x 250 2 x 150

Drawer unit 90/140, 100% opening

Model 90/140-1 90/140-2 90/140-3 90/140-4 90/140-14 90/140-19 90/140-23 90/140-24
Code (75 kg) 617 07 001 617 07 002 617 07 003 617 07 004 617 07 014 617 07 019 617 07 023 617 07 024
Code (200 kg) 617 07 001 H 617 07 002 H 617 07 003 H 617 07 004 H 617 07 014 H 617 07 019 H 617 07 023 H 617 07 024 H
Height (mm) 2 x 75 2 x 75 4 x 100 4 x 75 6 x 100 16 x 75 8 x 100 12 x 100
of the drawer

5 x 100 6 x 100 2 x 150 2 x 100 4 x 150 1 x 150

2 x 150 3 x 150 2 x 250 3 x 150 1 x 250

1 x 250 1 x 250

144 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 90

Drawer unit 90/140, 100% opening

Model 90/140-26 90/140-28 90/140-31 90/140-34 90/140-35 90/140-36 90/140-37 90/140-38
Code (75 kg) 617 07 026 617 07 028 617 07 031 617 07 034 617 07 035 617 07 036 617 07 037 617 07 038
Code (200 kg) 617 07 026 H 617 07 028 H 617 07 031 H 617 07 034 H 617 07 035 H 617 07 036 H 617 07 037 H 617 07 038 H
Height (mm) 10 x 75 6 x 75 9 x 100 8 x 150 8 x 75 6 x 75 2 x 75 2 x 100
of the drawer

3 x 100 3 x 100 2 x 150 6 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 150 4 x 250

1 x 150 3 x 150 2 x 150 3 x 250

1 x 250

Model 90/140-39 90/140-40 90/140-42 Internal drawer dimensions mm

Code (75 kg) 617 07 039 617 07 040 617 07 042 Width 810 Depth 612
Code (200 kg) 617 07 039 H 617 07 040 H 617 07 042 H Outer height mm Inner height mm
Height (mm) 12 x 75 12 x 75 1 x 100 75 49
of the drawer 100 74

2 x 150 3 x 100 4 x 150 150 124

250 224

2 x 250

Internal drawer dimensions: 810 x 612 x 49/74/124/224 mm.

The large drawer units 70, 90 and 130

include levelling screws, which help to
level the unit on uneven surfaces.

Drawer interiors
Tool troughs 33 and 45 mm
Name Code
Drawer 90/75 837 913-00
8 x 33 mm, 9 x 45 mm
Tool troughs leave 50 mm free space on one side of the drawer.

Tool troughs 45 and 70 mm

Name Code
Drawer 90/75 837 914-00
9 x 45 mm, 4 x 70 mm
Tool troughs leave 50 mm free space on one side of the drawer.

Pick up boxes
Name Code
Drawer 90/75 851 870-00
Includes 35 pick-up boxes with dividers.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 145

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 90

Divider Set 1
Name Code
90/75 873 041-49
90/100 873 051-49
90/150 & 250 873 061-49
7 dividers, 24 middle plates (24x100)

Divider Set 2
Name Code
90/75 873 042-49
90/100 873 052-49
90/150 & 250 873 062-49
6 dividers, 21 middle plates (15x100, 6x150)

Divider Set 3
Name Code
90/75 873 043-49
90/100 873 053-49
90/150 & 250 873 063-49
5 dividers, 17 middle plates (15x100, 2x300)

Divider Set 4
Name Code
90/75 873 044-49
90/100 873 054-49
90/150 & 250 873 064-49
4 dividers, 14 middle plates (6x100, 6x150, 2x300)

Divider Set 5
Name Code
90/75 873 045-49
90/100 873 055-49
90/150 & 250 873 065-49
3 dividers, 10 middle plates (6x100, 4x300)

Divider Set 6
Name Code
90/75 873 046-49
90/100 873 056-49
90/150 & 250 873 066-49
5 dividers, 18 middle plates (6x100, 12x150)

Divider Set 7
Name Code
90/75 873 047-49
90/100 873 057-49
90/150 & 250 873 067-49
4 middle plates (4x800)

Rubber mat for the drawer bottom +

Name Code For additional divider parts see page 201.
Rubber mat 90 854 080-00

146 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 130

Drawer unit 130

Drawers open
100% and their
load capacity is
75 kg or 200 kg.

1100 mm
1400 mm

71
5m
Easy to move with pallet truck or fork lift. m 1330 mm

Drawer unit 130/110, 100% opening

Model 130/110-1 130/110-2 130/110-3 130/110-4 130/110-13 130/110-20 130/110-21 130/110-33
Code (75 kg) 615 07 001 615 07 002 615 07 003 615 07 004 615 07 013 615 07 020 615 07 021 615 07 033
Code (200 kg) 615 07 001 H 615 07 002 H 615 07 003 H 615 07 004 H 615 07 013 H 615 07 020 H 615 07 021 H 615 07 033 H
Height (mm) 2 x 100 2 x 75 9 x 100 2 x 75 6 x 100 8 x 75 1 x 150 1 x 100
of the drawer
3 x 150 3 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 150 3 x 100 3 x 250 2 x 150

1 x 250 3 x 150 2 x 150 2 x 250

1 x 250

Model 130/110-34 130/110-43 130/110-44 130/110-45 130/110-46

Code (75 kg) 615 07 034 615 07 043 615 07 044 615 07 045 615 07 046
Code (200 kg) 615 07 034 H 615 07 043 H 615 07 044 H 615 07 045 H 615 07 046 H
Height (mm) 6 x 150 2 x 75 3 x 100 4 x 100 8 x 75
of the drawer

3 x 250 4 x 150 2 x 250 2 x 150

Drawer unit 130/140, 100% opening

Model 130/140-1 130/140-2 130/140-3 130/140-4 130/140-14 130/140-19 130/140-23 130/140-24
Code (75 kg) 618 07 001 618 07 002 618 07 003 618 07 004 618 07 014 618 07 019 618 07 023 618 07 024
Code (200 kg) 618 07 001 H 618 07 002 H 618 07 003 H 618 07 004 H 618 07 014 H 618 07 019 H 618 07 023 H 618 07 024 H
Height (mm) 2 x 75 2 x 75 4 x 100 4 x 75 6 x 100 16 x 75 8 x 100 12 x 100
of the drawer

5 x 100 6 x 100 2 x 150 2 x 100 4 x 150 1 x 150

2 x 150 3 x 150 2 x 250 3 x 150 1 x 250

1 x 250 1 x 250

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 147

 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 130

Drawer unit 130/140, 100% opening

Model 130/140-26 130/140-28 130/140-31 130/140-34 130/140-35 130/140-36 130/140-37 130/140-38
Code (75 kg) 618 07 026 618 07 028 618 07 031 618 07 034 618 07 035 618 07 036 618 07 037 618 07 038
Code (200 kg) 618 07 026 H 618 07 028 H 618 07 031 H 618 07 034 H 618 07 035 H 618 07 036 H 618 07 037 H 618 07 038 H
Height (mm) 10 x 75 6 x 75 9 x 100 8 x 150 8 x 75 6 x 75 2 x 75 2 x 100
of the drawer

3 x 100 3 x 100 2 x 150 6 x 100 2 x 100 2 x 150 4 x 250

1 x 150 3 x 150 2 x 150 3 x 250

1 x 250

Model 130/140-39 130/140-40 130/140-42 Internal drawer dimensions mm

Code (75 kg) 618 07 039 618 07 040 618 07 042 Width 1226 Depth 612
Code (200 kg) 618 07 039 H 618 07 040 H 618 07 042 H Outer height mm Inner height mm
Height (mm) 12 x 75 12 x 75 1 x 100 75 49
of the drawer
100 74
2 x 150 3 x 100 4 x 150 150 124
250 224

2 x 250

Internal drawer dimensions: 1226 x 612 x 49/74/124/224 mm.

Drawer interiors
Divider Set 1
Name Code
130/75 873 071-49
130/100 873 081-49
130/150 & 250 873 091-49
11 dividers, 36 middle plates (36x100)

Divider Set 2
Name Code
130/75 873 072-49
130/100 873 082-49
130/150 & 250 873 092-49
9 dividers, 30 middle plates (18x100, 12x150)

Divider Set 3
Name Code
130/75 873 073-49
130/100 873 083-49
130/150 & 250 873 093-49
7 dividers, 22 middle plates (18x100, 4x300)

Divider Set 4
Name Code
130/75 873 074-49
130/100 873 084-49
130/150 & 250 873 094-49
7 dividers, 23 middle plates (9x100, 12x150, 2x300)

* One example of interior solutions shown in picture.

148 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN
 DRAWER UNITS Drawer units 130

Divider Set 5
Name Code
130/75 873 075-49
130/100 873 085-49
130/150 & 250 873 095-49
7 dividers, 16 middle plates (16x150)

Divider Set 6
Name Code
130/75 873 076-49
130/100 873 086-49
130/150 & 250 873 096-49
5 dividers, 16 middle plates (12x150, 4x300)

Divider Set 7
Name Code
130/75 873 077-49
130/100 873 087-49
130/150 & 250 873 097-49
3 dividers, 12 middle plates (12x300)

Divider Set 8
Name Code
130/75 873 078-49
130/100 873 088-49
130/150 & 250 873 098-49
4 middle plates (4x1200)

Tool troughs 33 and 45 mm

Name Code
Drawer 130/75 837 912-00
16 x 33 mm, 12 x 45 mm

Tool troughs 45 and 70 mm

Name Code
Drawer 130/75 837 939-00
12 x 45 mm, 8 x 70 mm

Pick up boxes
Name Code
Drawer 130/75 851 872-00
Includes 56 pick-up boxes with dividers.

Rubber mat for the drawer bottom

Name Code
Rubber mat 130 854 082-00

+
For additional divider parts see page 201.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 149

 7. Storage systems

150 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 FiFo Flow Rack

Treston FiFo Flow Rack is a flexible shelving, storage and picking solution. It brings the items from the warehouse nearby
the production, assembly or packing station. Ensures the needed parts are at hand and no time is wasted searching for items,
supporting LEAN operations. FiFo (First in First out) flow ensures the oldest components are available first and the inventory is
at a good level. Reduce errors and allow personnel to concentrate on the work at hand improving quality.

No tools needed to easily modify for Quick and easy to assemble and adjust. Easy to accessorize, wide selection
different size bins and items. Only an allen key needed to assemble. of accessories. Can be turned into a
An included magnetic spirit level helps workstation with an additional shelf.
when levelling the feet with a wrench.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 151

 STORAGE SYSTEMS FiFo Flow
shelving
Rackand storage solution

1 2 3 4

FiFo Flow Rack

Name Suitability of bins Module Size Max Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
1 FiFo Flow Rack 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 1940 or similar. M900 933 x 805 x 1860 700 TFR900-49
24 pcs Treston stacking bins 3040, 24 pcs 300 x 400 euroboxes or similar. M1350 1385 x 805 x 1860 700 TFR1350-49
2 FiFo Flow Rack, 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 1940 or similar. M900 933 x 735 x 1860 700 TFR900RE-49
rear extension 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 3040, 12 pcs 300 x 400 euroboxes or similar. M1350 1385 x 735 x 1860 700 TFR1350RE-49
3 FiFo Flow Rack, 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 1940 or similar M900 933 x 805 x 1860 700 TFR900SE-49
side extension 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 3040, 24 pcs 300 x 400 euroboxes or similar. M1350 1385 x 805 x 1860 700 TFR1350SE-49
4 FiFo Flow Rack, 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 1940 or similar. M900 933 x 735 x 1860 700 TFR900SRE-49
side-rear extension 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 3040, 12 pcs 300 x 400 euroboxes or similar. M1350 1385 x 735 x 1860 700 TFR1350SRE-49
Rack includes 3 roller tops which are adjustable without any tools. Each roller top includes 8 pcs roller profiles and 3 pcs guide plates.
Many other bin size options are suitable by adding or removing roller profiles and guide plates.

FiFo Flow Rack with steel shelves

Name Suitability of bins Module Size Max Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
FiFo Flow Rack, 24 pcs Treston stacking bins 1940 or similar. M900 933 x 805 x 1860 700 TFR900SS-49
steel shelves 32 pcs Treston stacking bins 3040, 300 x 400 M1350 1385 x 805 x 1860 700 TFR1350SS-49
euroboxes or similar. Alternatively 48 pcs Treston
stacking bins 1940 or similar.
The rack includes 4 steel shelves which are adjustable.

Extendable with rear and side modules – with as many modules as needed.

152 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS FiFo Flow Rack

1 2 3 4 5 6

FiFo Flow Rack accessories

Name Description Module Size Max Code ESD
W x D x H mm load kg
1 Roller top An extra roller top increases the space for the bins in the FiFo flow rack. M900 852 x 766 x 105 220 TFRRT900-49
Includes fixing brackets. M1350 1279 x 766 x 105 220 TFRRT1350-49
2 Roller top, An extra roller top of rear extension increases the space for the bins in M900 852 x 766 x 105 220 TFRRT900RE-49
rear extension rear extension FiFo flow rack. Includes fixing brackets. M1350 1279 x 766 x 105 220 TFRRT1350RE-49
3 Additional shelf for Fifo Flow An extra steel shelf increases the space for the bins in steel shelves M900 852 x 789 x 53 220 TFRAS900-49
Rack with steel shelves version of FiFo flow rack. Includes fixing brackets. M1350 1310 x 789 x 52 220 TFRAS1350-49
4 Roller profile set, 4 pcs Extra roller profiles and guide plates allow you to increase storage 29 x 734 x 37 TFRRS-49
Guide plate set, 3 pcs space by using smaller bins in your FiFo flow rack. 2 x 718 x 70 TFRGP-49
5 Perforated panel set, With perforated panels you can cover both side of FiFo flow rack. With the 15 x 736 x 812 TFRPP-49
2 pcs (left, right) panel hooks you can use the side panels easily as tool storage as well.
6 Castor set ESD* Castor set for Treston FiFo Flow Rack M900 ESD TFR900CS-49
Castor set for Treston FiFo Flow Rack M1350 ESD TFR1350CS-49
* Also non-ESD castors available, use code TFR900CS-41 / TFR1350CS-41.
All Treston accessories available for upright tubes are suitable for Fifo Flow Rack.

Watch the 2 min animation showcasing the features:

https://vimeo.com/427987809
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 153
 Shelves and cabinets

Shelves and cabinets help keep the workplace in good order. During selection the space available and load capacity
required must be taken into account. Shelving units are also excellent as room dividers. ESD protection is also available.

Extended tool life Storage system is modifiable

The service life and condition of tools can be significantly A storage system is built around the basic component: ex-
improved through their appropriate storage. They can be tension parts, doors, screens, and other accessories can
stored in their own places, protected from dust and dirt, in be added to create an efficient overall solution. In addition
a locked cabinet. the shelf heights can easily be adjusted as needed. Even
the load capacity can be increased by adding additional
A versatile storage solution is created by using supports.
suitable accessories
An open shelf is not always the best way to store things.
Tools, expensive equipment, and small items need another
type of solution. Through using lockable drawers or add-
ing doors and panels, an open shelving system is turned
into a versatile storage solution. Drawers can be fitted with
a variety of interior combinations, to suit the tools stored in
them.

154 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Heavy storage system is designed for heavy

items
When the items are heavy, shelves need to be very strong
as well. Computer servers or large measurement instruments
can be surprisingly heavy. A heavy storage system is de-
signed for load capacities of up to 400 kg/shelf.

Industrial cabinets allow for a tidy, efficient

working environment
No unnecessary time should be spent looking for tools
and materials. This interrupts work and causes stress. In a
well-equipped cabinet, everything is where it should be.
A ready-assembled cabinet is easy to move to the most
convenient location. There are levelling screws under the
cabinet. This makes it easy to adjust the cabinet so that
it stands straight on uneven surfaces. Most module-750
and -500 accessories, such as shelves, drawer units,
perforated panels, and pull-out shelves, can be used in
selecting accessories for the cabinet.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 155

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Shelving system
Shelving system can be built as a combination of cabinets and shelves and you can use it as a space divider. The storage
system is available in two standard heights: 200 cm and 240 cm and two widths: 80 cm and 100 cm.

Standard bays
Name Size W x D mm Code
Standard bay 80/30/200 824 x 300 x 2000 C 313 49 001P
Standard bay 80/40/200 824 x 400 x 2000 C 314 49 001P
Standard bay 100/30/200 1024 x 300 x 2000 C 313 49 002P
Standard bay 100/40/200 1024 x 400 x 2000 C 314 49 003P
Standard bay 100/50/200 1024 x 500 x 2000 C 315 49 001P
Standard bay 100/60/200 1024 x 600 x 2000 C 316 49 001P
Standard bay 80/40/240 824 x 400 x 2400 C 314 49 002P
Standard bay 100/40/240 1024 x 400 x 2400 C 314 49 004P
Standard bay 100/50/240 1024 x 500 x 2400 C 315 49 002P
Standard bay 100/60/240 1024 x 600 x 2400 C 316 49 002P

Extension bays
Name Size W x D mm Code
Extension bay 80/30/200 804 x 300 x 2000 C 323 49 001P
Extension bay 80/40/200 804 x 400 x 2000 C 324 49 001P
Extension bay 100/30/200 1004 x 300 x 2000 C 323 49 002P
Extension bay 100/40/200 1004 x 400 x 2000 C 324 49 003P
Extension bay 100/50/200 1004 x 500 x 2000 C 325 49 001P
Extension bay 100/60/200 1004 x 600 x 2000 C 326 49 001P
Extension bay 80/40/240 804 x 400 x 2400 C 324 49 002P All standard and
Extension bay 100/40/240 1004 x 400 x 2400 C 324 49 004P extension parts
Extension bay 100/50/240 1004 x 500 x 2400 C 325 49 002P include 6 shelves.
Extension bay 100/60/240 1004 x 600 x 2400 C 326 49 002P
All standard and extension bays include 6 shelves. For additional shelves see
page 158.

The W x D x H rule
! All our dimensions follow a WDH rule, where the first
dimension is the width (W), the middle the depth (D), and the
last the height (H).

Load capacity
1000 kg/bay
Combination name 150 kg/shelf
width 824 mm

100/30/200-1
150 kg/shelf
width 1024 mm
Width cm
Depth cm Height cm Version

156 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Shelving system combinations

100/30/200-8 C 340 07 108

Qty Name Size mm Code
3 End frame/open 300 x 2000 830 615-49
8 Shelf+brackets 1000 x 300 852 175-49
4 Perforated panel 983 x 500 852 145-07
2 Cross support pair 1000 852 176-49

100/40/200-1 C 344 07 001

Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 C 344 07 000
4 Shelf 1000 x 400 852 231-49

100/40/200-4 C 344 07 004

Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 C 344 07 000
2 Shelf 1000 x 400 852 231-49
2 Perforated panel 983 x 500 852 145-07
3 Drawer 400 834 513-49

100/40/200-9 C 340 07 109

Qty Name Size mm Code
2 End frame/open 400 x 2000 830 895-49
14 Shelf+brackets 1000 x 400 852 231-49
2 Cross support pair 1000 852 176-49
2 Perforated panel 983 x 500 852 145-07
1 Cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 C 344 07 000

Move with a pallet truck

! The cabinet can be moved with a pallet truck or a forklift
when the plinth front panel has been removed. Cabinets are
equipped with adjustment screws.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 157

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Shelving system includes a wide range of different parts which can be used to create a fully tailor-made solution.

Perforated plate
Steel divider pair

Drawer

Cross
support pair

Shelf Shelf divider

End frame, Sidewall

open

Shelving system components Shelves

Name Size D x H mm Code Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
End frame, open 300 x 2000 830 615-49 Shelf 800 x 300 150 852 235-49
End frame, open 400 x 2000 830 895-49 Shelf 800 x 400 150 852 234-49
Sidewall 400 x 2000 859 440-49 Shelf 1000 x 300 150 852 175-49
End frame, open 500 x 2000 851 719-49 Shelf 1000 x 400 150 852 231-49
Sidewall 500 x 2000 859 450-49 Shelf 1000 x 500 150 852 185-49
End frame, open 600 x 2000 851 725-49 Shelf 1000 x 600 150 852 187-49
Sidewall 600 x 2000 859 460-49 Brackets included.
End frame, open 400 x 2400 851 717-49
End frame, open 500 x 2400 851 721-49
End frame, open 600 x 2400 851 724-49
Shelf dividers
Cross support pair 1000 852 176-49 Name Size D x H mm Code

Cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 C 344 07 000 Steel divider pair 285 x 190 861 116-49
Cabinet 100/50/200 1030 x 530 x 2010 C 345 07 000 Steel divider pair 385 x 190 861118-49
Cabinet 100/60/200 1030 x 630 x 2010 C 346 07 000 Shelf divider 400 400 x 180 832 839-49
Back wall 1000 1000 x 2000 859 447-49 Shelf divider 400 400 x 260 832 847-49
Perforated end plate 400* 340 x 2000 830 917-07 Shelf divider 400 400 x 370 832 855-49
Screw set (fixing back to back) 838 440-51 Shelf divider 500 500 x 260 852 271-49
Perforated panel 1000 983 x 500 852 145-07 Shelf divider 500 500 x 370 852 273-49
Additional support for shelf 1000 852 267-49 Shelf divider 600 600 x 260 852 797-49
* suitable for End frame open 400 x 2000. Shelf divider 600 600 x 370 852 798-49
Cabinets supplied in parts.

Drawers and interior combinations

Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Drawer 100/100, for 400 deep cabinet 920 x 345 x 107 30 834 513-49
Drawer 100/100, for 500 deep cabinet 920 x 345 x 107 30 834 514-49
1 2
1 Middle divider and middle plates 834 507-49
2 Middle divider and middle plates 834 508-49
3 Middle divider and middle plates 834 509-49
4 Pick up boxes 834 512-00
Drawers also suitable for shelving cabinets on page 162. 3 4

158 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Heavy shelving system

Heavy shelving system is suitable for large and heavy items. The shelf load capacity is 400 kg and the shelf depth is 70 cm.
It can be built as a combination of cabinets, drawers and shelves. The heavy storage system comes in one standard height of
200 cm and two widths: 75 cm and 95 cm.

1. Standard bays 1
Name Size W x D x H mm Code
Standard bay, open 750 x 714 x 2000 C 375 49 001
Standard bay, closed* 750 x 714 x 2000 C 376 49 001
Standard bay, open 950 x 714 x 2000 C 395 49 001
Standard bay, closed* 950 x 714 x 2000 C 396 49 001
*The standard bay, closed, includes back sheet and closed ends.

2. Extension bays
Name Size W x D x H mm Code
Extension bay, open 705 x 714 x 2000 C 377 49 001
Extension bay, closed* 705 x 714 x 2000 C 378 49 001
Extension bay, open 905 x 714 x 2000 C 397 49 001
Extension bay, closed* 905 x 714 x 2000 C 398 49 001
*The extension bay, closed, includes back sheet and closed end.

All standard and

extension bays
include 6 shelves.

The W x D x H rule
! All our dimensions follow a WDH rule, where the first
dimension is the width (W), the middle the depth (D),
and the last the height (H).

Load capacity
2000 kg/bay
400 kg/shelf
width 750 mm

350 kg/shelf
width 950 mm

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 159

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Heavy shelving system combinations

95/200-1 C 395 49 001

Qty Name Size mm Code
2 End frame/open 714 x 2000 852 002-49
6 Shelf 90 860 x 714 852 012-49
1 Cross support pair 851 671-49

75/200-2 C 377 07 002

Qty Name Size mm Code
2 Base/top 70 660 x 714 852 004-49
1 Back sheet 70 740 x 1990 852 009-49
2 End frame/closed 714 x 2000 852 001-49
5 Shelf 70 660 x 714 852 003-49
1 Door pair 700 x 2000 852 000-07

75/200-28
Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Locking shelf 660 x 714 852 007-49
1 End frame/open 714 x 2000 852 002-49
4 Base/top 70 660 x 714 852 004-49
7 Shelf 70 660 x 714 852 003-49
1 Locking element 851 675-49
2 End frame/closed 714 x 2000 852 001-49
3 Drawer 70/50 612 x 612 x 50 833 967-07
2 Drawer 70/100 612 x 612 x 100 833 975-07
2 Drawer 70/150 612 x 612 x 150 833 983-07
1 Drawer 70/250 612 x 612 x 250 833 991-07
1 Back sheet 70 740 x 1990 852 009-49

75/200-9
Qty Name Size mm Code
1 Locking shelf 660 x 714 852 007-49
4 Base/top 70 660 x 714 852 004-49
7 Shelf 70 660 x 714 852 003-49
3 End frame/closed 714 x 2000 852 001-49
3 Drawer 70/50 612 x 612 x 50 833 967-07
2 Drawer 70/100 612 x 612 x 100 833 975-07
2 Drawer 70/150 612 x 612 x 150 833 983-07
1 Drawer 70/250 612 x 612 x 250 833 991-07
2 Back sheet 70 740 x 1990 852 009-49
1 Door pair 700 x 2000 852 000-07
1 Locking element 851 675-49

160 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Combination name

95/200-1
Width cm Heavy shelving system includes a wide range of different parts
Height cm Version which can be used to create a fully tailor-made solution.

Base/top
End frame, open
Back sheet

End frame,
closed

Drawer

Locking
element

Door pair
Locking shelf

Pull-out shelf Shelf

Cross support pair

Base/top

Heavy shelving system components Heavy shelving system drawers

Name Size Max Code Name Size W x D mm Effective Max Opens Code
W x D mm load kg height mm load kg %
End frame/open 714 x 2000 852 002-49 Drawer 70/75 612 x 612 x 75 60 75 100 833 401-07
End frame/closed 714 x 2000 852 001-49 Drawer 70/100 612 x 612 x 100 85 75 100 833 975-07
Base/top 70 660 x 714 852 004-49 Drawer 70/150 612 x 612 x 150 135 75 100 833 983-07
Base/top 90 860 x 714 852 013-49 Drawer 70/250 612 x 612 x 250 235 75 100 833 991-07
Cross support pair 851 671-49 Pull-out shelf 70 612 x 612 x 85 75 100 852 017-07
Back sheet 70 740 x 1990 852 009-49 Pull-out shelf 90 860 x 612 x 85 75 100 852 019-07
Back sheet 90 940 x 1990 852 016-49 Drawer 90/75 860 x 612 x 75 49 75 100 854 262-07
Shelf 70 660 x 714 400 852 003-49 Drawer 90/100 860 x 612 x 100 74 75 100 854 246-07
Shelf 90 860 x 714 350 852 012-49 Drawer 90/150 860 x 612 x 150 124 75 100 854 248-07
Door pair* 700 x 2000 852 000-07 Drawer 90/250 860 x 612 x 250 224 75 100 854 249-07
Door pair* 900 x 2000 852 011-07
Locking shelf 70* 660 x 714 852 007-49
Locking shelf 90* 860 x 714 852 015-49
Locking element 1000 851 675-49
For 200 kg loading capacity on drawers and pull-out
*Door/locking shelf equipped with lock ! shelves add H to the end of code.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 161

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Shelving cabinets
The shelving cabinets are pre-assembled. The cabinet has sturdy double leaf-doors, flush fitting handle with two keys. Shelving
cabinet can be moved with fork lift. There are leveling screws under the cabinet for adjusting the cabinet straight. Loading ca-
pacity 150kg/shelf, 600kg/cabinet. Shelving cabinets are made of epoxy powder coated steel. The frames are painted with
light grey RAL 7035 and doors either with blue RAL5007 or with light grey RAL7035.

Move with a pallet truck

! The cabinet can be moved with a
pallet truck or a forklift when it is
empty. Cabinets are equipped with
leveling screws.

Name Size W x D x H mm Code blue Code grey

Shelving cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 SC10040200-07 SC10040200-49
Shelving cabinet 100/50/200 1030 x 530 x 2010 SC10050200-07 SC10050200-49
Shelving cabinet 100/60/200 1030 x 630 x 2010 SC10060200-07 SC10060200-49
Includes 4 shelves. For additional drawers, shelves and perforated panel see page 158.

The W x D x H rule
! All our dimensions follow a WDH rule, where the first
dimension is the width (W), the middle the depth (D), and the
last the height (H).

Load capacity

Combination name
150 kg/shelf

100/40/200

600 kg/cabinet

Width cm Depth cm Height cm

162 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Shelving cabinets with plexiglass doors

Name Size W x D x H mm Code blue
Shelving cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 SC10040200-07-TD
Shelving cabinet 100/50/200 1030 x 530 x 2010 SC10050200-07-TD
Shelving cabinet 100/60/200 1030 x 630 x 2010 SC10060200-07TD
Includes 4 shelves. For additional shelves and perforated panel see page 158.

Shelving cabinets with plexiglass doors

Name Size W x D x H mm Code grey
Shelving cabinet 100/40/200 1030 x 430 x 2010 SC10040200-41-TD
Shelving cabinet 100/50/200 1030 x 530 x 2010 SC10050200-41-TD
Shelving cabinet 100/60/200 1030 x 630 x 2010 SC10060200-41-TD
Includes 4 shelves. For additional shelves and perforated panel see page 158.

Our 400, 500 and 600 mm deep

shelf and stacking bins are ideal to
use with shelving cabinets.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 163

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Industrial cabinets
High-quality industrial cabinets are made of epoxy powder coated steel. The cabinet frames
have a lock with two keys, sturdy double leaf-doors and adjustable feet, and with a wide range
of accessories it can be easily customized into versatile storage solutions, e.g. for tool storage or
shelving. The industrial cabinets are pre-assembled. The frames are painted with light grey RAL 7035
and doors either with blue RAL 5007 or with light grey RAL 7035.

All cabinets are also available with flush fitting handle lock
or digital code lock.

Alternate locking method can be ordered by adding a T or E in the

end of the product code (e.g. C309 07 000 T).

T= for flush fitting E = for digital

handle code lock

Both locks are also available to the shelving system cabinets.

Industrial cabinet combinations

55/100-1 C 301 07 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 55/100 C 301 07 000
2 Steel shelf 55 854 349-49
(Flush fitting handle not suitable)

80/100-1 C 305 07 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/100 C 305 07 000
2 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49

Combination name

55/100-1
Practical!
! 100 cm high cabinet tops have a back
Width cm stop and rubber mat to be used as an
Height cm Version additional work top.
Depth of cabinet: 425 mm

164 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

80/100-2 C 305 07 002

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/100 C 305 07 000
2 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49
1 Drawer 80 854 346-49

55/160-1 C 303 07 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 55/160 C 303 07 000
3 Steel shelf 55 854 349-49
(Flush fitting handle not suitable)

80/160-1 C 307 07 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/160 C 307 07 000
3 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49

Move with a pallet truck

The cabinet can be moved with a pallet
truck or a forklift when the plinth front
panel has been removed. Cabinets are
equipped with leveling screws.

80/160-2 C 307 07 102

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/160 C 307 07 000
2 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49
4 Bin rail, M750 859 151-49
21 Stacking bin 1015-5
5 Stacking bin 1525-5

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 165

 ESD versions also available!
All industrial cabinets can be ordered as ESD versions by replacing the col-
our code 07 (blue) with 49 (ESD light grey). This means that in addition to
the cabinet frame, the doors will also be painted with light grey ESD paint,
RAL 7035. Please remember to use only ESD bins and mats with these ESD
industrial cabinets.

80/200 C 309 49 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/200 C 309 49 000
4 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49

80/100 C 305 49 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/100 C 305 49 000
2 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49

80/200-1 C 309 07 001

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/200 C 309 07 000
4 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49

80/200-2 C 309 07 102

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/200 C 309 07 000
2 Drawer 80 854 346-49
2 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49
5 Plastic container 1525-5
1 Suspension rail, M750 859 151-49
1 Extendable shelf 80 854 347-49
1 Perforated panel 718 x 612 835 633-07
2 Perforated panel 288 x 712 854 353-07
1 Pair of support feet 864 730-49

166 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

80/200-3 C 309 07 103

Qty Name Code
1 Cabinet frame 80/200 C 309 07 000
2 Drawer 80 854 346-49
2 Steel shelf 80 854 345-49
3 Shelf divider H 370/400 832 855-49
1 Perforated panel 736x 640 835 633-07
1 Extendable shelf 80 854 347-49
1 Pair of support feet 864 730-49
1 Pair of steel dividers 861 116-49
1 Drawer for suspension folders 854 348-49

When the cabinet is used

for storing folders,
a separate pull-out shelf is a good
idea. This shelf makes it easy to
browse through the folders.

Industrial cabinet with plexiglass doors

Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Cabinet frame 80/200, 800 x 425 x 2000 1000 C 309 07 000-TD
blue doors
Cabinet frame 80/200, 800 x 425 x 2000 1000 C 309 41 000-TD
grey doors
Cabinet 80/200 800 x 425 x 2000 1000* C 309 07 001-TD
with 4 shelves, blue doors
Cabinet 80/200 800 x 425 x 2000 1000* C 309 41 001-TD
with 4 shelves, grey doors
*100 kg / shelf

Computer cabinet
Computer cabinet protects equipment from dust and dirt, even
in the most demanding conditions. The computer cabinet is pres-
surised and equipped with an air filter that keeps the dust out. A
screen up to a maximum size of 26” will fit in the computer cabinet.

Name Size mm Code

Computer cabinet 800 x 500 x 1600 854 358-49
Computer cabinet 800 x 500 x 1600 854 364-49
(without the energy rail)
Flush fitting handle not suitable.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 167

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Shelves and cabinets

Industrial cabinet accessories

Cabinet frames
Name Size W x D x H mm Code
Most of the M750 accessories fit the cabinet
Cabinet frame 55/100 550 x 425 x 1000 C 301 07 000
80 and can be easily installed inside.
Cabinet frame 80/100 800 x 425 x 1000 C 305 07 000
Cabinet frame 55/160 550 x 425 x 1600 C 303 07 000
Cabinet frame 80/160 800 x 425 x 1600 C 307 07 000
Cabinet frame 80/160, half doors 800 x 425 x 1600 C 307 07 004
Cabinet frame 80/200 800 x 425 x 2000 C 309 07 000
Cabinet frames can be ordered with a turning handle with integrated key lock by adding a T in
the end of the product code (e.g. C309 07 000 T). Not suitable for 55/100 and 55/160.

Cabinet accessories
Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Perforated panel for the door or side wall 290 x 740 854 353-07
Perforated panel for the back wall M500 468 x 389 860 951-49
Perforated panel for the back wall M750 736 x 640 835 633-07/-49
Perforated panel for the back wall M750 736 x 1003 835 641-07/-49
Pair of steel dividers 1 x 285 x 190 861 116-49
Steel shelf 55 545 x 391 x 32 100 854 349-49
Steel shelf 80 730 x 396 x 32 100 854 345-49
Shelf divider 1 x 400 x 180 832 839-49
Shelf divider 1 x 400 x 260 832 847-49
Shelf divider 1 x 400 x 370 832 855-49
Pull-out shelf 80 730 x 362 x 42 30 854 347-49
Drawer 55 480 x 362 x 90 30 854 344-49
Drawer 80 730 x 362 x 90 30 854 346-49
Drawer for suspension folders 724 x 350 x 240 30 854 348-49
Pair of support feet 40 x 220 x 6 864 730-49
Suspension rail 50 859 151-49

Cone rack M750

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Cone rack M750 742 x 206 x 95 50 890 729-49
Can be mounted to uprights, Fitter’s trolley, Basic trolley, industrial screen,
Treston Tower and industrial cabinet.

Tool holders
Name Cone rack Width Code
M750 mm
can hold pcs
Tool holder, HSK A40-B53 11 64 854 213-00
Tool holder, HSK A63-B83 8 82 854 212-00
Tool holder, HSK A100-B128 6 106 854 211-00
Tool holder, CAPTO C4 8 82 854 210-00
Tool holder, CAPTO C5 8 82 854 209-00
Tool holder, CAPTO C6 8 82 854 208-00
Tool holder, CAPTO C8 6 106 854 207-00
Tool holder, ISO 30 11 65 854 205-00
Tool holder, ISO 40 11 65 854 204-00
Tool holder, ISO 45 8 83 854 206-00
Tool holder, ISO 50 7 101 854 200-00
Cone rack M750

168 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 Perforated panels

Perforated panels are efficient dividers of space and, at the same time, practical storage facilities for tools and equip-
ment. An industrial screen can be used as a sound-insulating space divider by equiping it with back panel elements
with fireproof insulation.

Order and tidiness are appreciated

Order and tidiness cannot be achieved and maintained without there being a place for each tool. Perforated panels and
hooks offer a practical and versatile solution for storing tools and equipment. Perforated panel products are available for
direct fastening to the wall or for fastening to upright profiles or tubes.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 169

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Perforated panels

Perforated back and wall panels

The perforated back panels are fastened either to the upright tubes (with Concept, TED, TP benches and Workshop benches)
or accessory frame AKK (with WB bench). The size of the perforation is 9 x 9 mm, center to center 38 mm.

1. Perforated panels for upright tubes

Name Module Size W x H mm Code
Perforated back panel M500 468 x 389 861 501-07/-49 1 2
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 194 861 510-07/-49
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 389 861 511-07/-49
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 612 861 512-07/-49
Perforated back panel, M750 718 x 612 861 701-07/-49
insulated
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 1003 861 514-07/-49
Perforated back panel M900 871 x 389 861 516-07/-49
Perforated back panel M900 871 x 612 861 517-07/-49
Perforated back panel M900 871 x 1003 861 519-07/-49
Perforated back panel M1000 968 x 389 861 532-07/-49
Perforated back panel M1000 968 x 612 861 538-07/-49
Perforated back panel M1000 968 x 1003 861 535-07/-49 3
Perforated back panel M1200 1168 x 389 861 533-07/-49
Perforated back panel M1350 1318 x 389 861 521-07/-49
Perforated back panel M1500 1474 x 389 861 526-07/-49
Perforated back panel M1800 1774 x 389 861 531-07/-49
Fastened to the upright tubes (see page 55).

4
2. Back panels for upright tubes
Name Module Size W x H mm Code
Back panel M500 468 x 389 861 541-49
Back panel M750 718 x 194 861 550-49
Back panel M750 718 x 389 861 551-49
Back panel M750 718 x 612 861 552-49
Back panel M900 871 x 389 861 556-49
Fastened to the upright tubes (see page 55). 5

3. Perforated panels for TPH benches

Size W x H mm Suitable for Code
1115 x 750 TPH712 RL120
1415 x 750 TPH715/ 915 RL150
1715 x 750 TPH718/ 918 RL180
Panel hooks TPH RK1
Mount on TPH benches with panel hooks RK1. Can also be attached to a wall
with screws (included).

4. Perforated panels for WB benches 5. Perforated wall panels fastened to the wall
Size W x H mm Suitable for Code ESD Name Size W x H mm Code
668 x 500 AKK70, AKK150 ARL70 Perforated wall panel 454 x 988 837 369-07
968 x 500 AKK180 ARL100 Perforated wall panel 949 x 988 837 334-07
Mount on accessory frame AKK (see page 72). Perforated wall panel 949 x 1444 837 342-07
Perforated wall panel 949 x 1976 837 350-07
Fastened directly to the wall using screws.

170 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Perforated panels

Perforated industrial screens

These industrial screens are modular, and they can be equipped
with all M750 accessories. Industrial screens can be used as space
dividers. They can also provide noise insulation; the combinations
available have perforated back panels on both sides and one side
is insulated.

Industrial screens
Name Size W x D x H mm Code
Standard part, T-feet 780 x 60 x 1850 C 520 07 101
Extension part, T-foot 750 x 560 x 1850 C 520 07 102
Extension part, L-foot 750 x 310 x 1850 C 520 07 103
Extension part, I-foot 750 x 60 x 1850 C 520 07 104
Includes 6 perforated back panels, 3 pcs/side.
Standard part, T-feet Extension part, T-foot
The standard part includes two feet.
The extension part includes one foot.

Parts
Name Size W x D x H mm Code
T-foot 1850 836 516-49
L-foot 1850 836 532-49
I-foot 1850 836 597-49
Spacer bar 750 835 838-49
Corner joint pair* 847 615-51
Perforated back panel M750 718 x 17 x 612 861 512-07/-49
Perforated back panel M750, 718 x 17 x 612 861 701-07/-49
insulated**
Upper list 718 x 65 851 907-07 Extension part, L-foot Extension part, I-foot
The wall module requires two spacer bars.
* For fixing two wall modules at 90° angle
** The insulation material used is polyether foam.
Most M750 accessories are suitable for the industrial screen.

Examples of industrial screen accessories

Name Size W x D mm Max load kg Code
Steel shelf M750 740 x 300 50 836 028-49
Steel shelf M750 740 x 400 50 852 770-49 Steel shelf
Bin rail M750 742 x 100 50 859 151-49
Auxiliary steel shelf for perfo- 159 x 243 x 56 ASSA5PP
rated panel

+
More accessories starting from page 55.
M750 accessories suit these industrial screens. Bin rail M750 with brackets and stacking bins.

The colour code is included in those product codes

! that are formed with numbers.

It is either at the end, following the hyphen (e.g. 860 804-49), or in the middle
(e.g. C 334 07 000).
Auxiliary steel shelf for perforated panel

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 171

 Tool storage systems

These two little giants provide efficiency and order to the storage of tools and components. Their capacity is sufficient
even for extremely heavy loads, and thanks to the versatile selection of accessories, you can customise them to meet
your needs.

The tool storage system is a handy storage solution comprising a sturdy frame and perforated panels. Treston Tower is a
4-sided, movable little giant for efficient storage and work.

+
Treston Industrial Multi Trolley with perforated
panels on page 112.

172 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Tool storage systems

Tool storage system

Tool storage system requires only 2 m² of floor space
and provides 16 m² of storage space. There is no need
to fasten it to the floor, as it stands firmly on its own. There is
a castor on the lower edge of the panels which makes them
easy to move.

The load capacity is 100 kg/panel. Includes 4 panels;

additional panels are available (ordered separately). A
maximum of 10 panels can be fastened to the tool storage
system.

Tool storage system

Name Size W x H mm Code
Tool storage system, 4 panels 1025 x 1035 x 2125 830 518-07P/-49P
Additional panel 15 x 949 x 1976 830 682-07P/-49P

Cabinet style tool storage

Watch this animation showcasing the versatile usage options

of our technical furniture: https://vimeo.com/213996808
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 173
 STORAGE SYSTEMS Tool storage systems

Treston Tower storage and

workstation unit
Being versatile and easily customisable for different environ-
ments and tasks, the Treston Tower storage and workstation
unit is ideal for, for example, vehicle and machinery assembly
lines, service and maintenance departments, and for any work
that requires plenty of mobile storage and workspace near the
product under work.

When the storage and/or load capacity of a wheeled service trol-

ley or drawer unit is not enough and you need a unit that is easier
to move than a fixed workstation and can be equipped in many
ways, the Treston Tower storage and workstation unit is the correct
choice.

The frame is made of powder-coated steel (grey, RAL7045).

Accessories and add-on products are available in light grey
(RAL7035).

Treston Tower storage and workstation unit

Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Treston Tower frame 860 x 880 x 1960 1000 890 700-45
Treston Tower frame with castors 860 x 880 x 2105 600 890 701-45

174 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Tool storage systems

2
8
6
7
4

1
5

Examples of accessories and add-on products

Name Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code
1 Flow-through shelf + brackets M750* 718 x 830 150 890 710-49
2 Spacer bar, M750** 851 483-49
3 Perforated back panel M750, max 3 pcs/side 718 x 612 861 512-49
4 Hook set 3 (69 pcs) 855 003-51
5 Steel shelf M750 740 x 400 50 852 770-49
6 Bin rail M750 742 x 100 50 859 151-49
7 LCD monitor holder for perforated panel 10 890 715-49
8 Treston NaturLite Led Wing 500 430 x 120 x 50 TNL500W
(+ bracket 95/120 mm)
* A flow-through shelf can fit two 400-mm deep shelf bins successively.
** Recommended to be used with flow-through shelving.

Wide range of accessories and add-on products

! Because the frame is equipped with the M750 upright frame module, almost all modular size M750 accessories are compatible with the Treston
Tower storage and workstation unit. Also remember the tool hooks (R hooks) and stacking and shelf bins.

Watch this animation showcasing the versatile usage options of our

technical furniture: https://vimeo.com/360212786
TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 175
 Panel hooks

Our selection includes more than 50 different kinds of hooks and brackets for the efficient storage and organisation
of tools. All the panel hooks and tool holders are easy to attach to the perforated panels and wall panels. The perforated
panels are an efficient way to integrate the tool holders and panel hooks to Treston workbenches, trolleys and cabinets. You
can also create a tool storage on the wall by using the perforated wall panels.

Hooks also for

heavy loads
The hooks can withstand
loads of up to 10 kg.

176 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Panel hooks

Panel hooks
Hook R1 R1
Name L Ø Max load kg Code
Hook R1 30 3 10 853 207-51
Hook R1 50 4 10 853 208-51
Hook R1 50 6 10 853 241-51
Hook R1 80 6 10 853 209-51
Hook R1 100 4 8 853 210-51
Hook R1 100 6 10 853 211-51
Hook R1 150 4 4 853 212-51
Hook R1 150 6 10 853 213-51
Hook R1 200 4 2 853 214-51
Hook R1 200 6 6 853 215-51
R2
Hook R1 300 6 3 853 216-51
Hook R1 300 8 8 853 217-51
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.

Hook R2
Name L Ø A Max load kg Code
Hook R2 33 3 17 10 853 218-51
Hook R2 43 4 25 10 853 219-51
Hook R2 43 4 40 10 853 220-51
Hook R2 100 6 25 10 853 221-51 R3
Hook R2 150 4 16,5 6 853 222-51
Hook R2 150 6 25 10 853 223-51
Hook R2 200 6 25 10 853 224-51
L = hook length mm
A = free gap mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.

Hook R3
Name L Ø Max load kg Code
Hook R3 10 6 10 853 225-51
Hook R3 50 6 10 853 226-51 R10
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.

Hook R10
Name L A Max load kg Code
Hook R10 28 9 10 853 227-51
Hook R10 33 17 10 853 228-51
L = hook length mm
A = free gap mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.
R13

Hook R13
Name L Ø Max load kg Code
Hook R13 157 3 1 853 229-51
L = hook length mm
The order number includes 5 pcs.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 177

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Panel hooks

Hook R16
Name L Max load kg Code R16 R19
Hook R16 20 10 831 514-51
Hook R16 46 10 831 506-51
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 1 pc.

Hook R19
Name Ø Code
Hook R19 13 853 231-51
Hook R19 19 853 232-51
R24
Hook R19 22 853 233-51
All order numbers include 5 pc.

Hook R24
Name L Ø Code
Hook R24 65 17 831 700-51
Hook R24 80 26 831 719-51
Hook R24 100 42 852 167-51
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 1 pc.

R26

Hook R26
Name L Ø Code
Hook R26 160 10 838 896-51
L = hook length mm
The order number includes 1 pc.

Hook R29
Name L Max load kg Code
Hook R29 40 5 853 234-51
Hook R29 60 5 853 235-51
Hook R29 80 10 853 236-51
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.
R29

Hook R30
Name L Ø Max load kg Code
Hook R30 35 4 10 853 237-51
Hook R30 85 6 10 853 238-51
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.
R30 R33

Hook R33
Name H Ø Code
Hook R33 30 90 832 162-51
H = hook height mm
The order number includes 1 pc.

178 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Panel hooks

Hook R35
Name L A Max load kg Code
R35 R37
Hook R35 17 35 5 853 239-51
Hook R35 17 55 5 853 240-51
L = hook length mm
A = free gap mm
All order numbers include 5 pcs.

Hook R37
Name Ø Max load kg Code
Hook R37 40 10 831 433-51 R41
Hook R37 60 10 831 441-51
Hook R37 80 10 831 603-51
All order numbers include 1 pc.

Hook R41
Name L Code
Hook R41 556 838 357-51
L = hook length mm R43
The order number includes 1 pc.

Hook R43
Name L Code
Hook R43 238 838 373-51
L = hook length mm
The order number includes 1 pc.
R46

Hook R46
Name L Code
Hook R46 112 for stacking bins 831 794-51
1015 and 30-1L
Hook R46 634 bin rail for six 839 086-51
stacking bins
1015 and 30-1L
L = hook length mm
All order numbers include 1 pc.
R47

Hook R47
Name WxD Max load kg Code
Hook R47 350 x 120 4 831 654-49
The order number includes 1 pc.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 179

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Panel hooks

Hook R48
Name WxDxH Code R48
Hook R48 235 x 200 x 370 838 380-51
The order number includes 1 pc.

Hook R49
Name WxDxH Code
Paper roll holder
Hook R49 300 x 70 x 40 838 381-51
The order number includes 1 pc.

R49
Paper roll holder
Name L Code
Paper roll holder 300 854 043-49
L = max roll width mm

Other supplies
Name Size Max Code
W x D x H mm load kg
Box holder for four pick up 456 x 165 x 48 5 854 042-49
boxes
Pick up box 149 x 85 x 48 851 843-00
Utility box 410 x 155 x 90 4 854 041-49
Folder compartment 466 x 90 x 240 4 854 040-49
LCD monitor holder for 120 x 38 x 150 10 890 715-49
perforated panel Box holder
Auxiliary steel shelf for 159 x 243 x 56 ASSA5PP
perforated panel
Bracket for fixing small plastic 274 x 12 x 46 890 535-51
storage cabinet to perforated
panel

Utility box Folder compartment

LCD monitor holder for Auxiliary steel shelf for

perforated panel perforated panel

Bracket for fixing small plastic storage cabinet to perforated

panel

180 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Panel hooks

Hook sets
Ready-made hook sets help you to get
started. Choose the most suitable hook
set for your needs from the following
possibilities:

Hook set 1: Basic light hook set Hook set 2: Basic hook set for hand tools

Hook set 3: Hook set for perforated tool Hook set 4: All inclusive set for hand Hook set 5: Hook set for heavy tools in
cabinet tools perforated tool cabinet

Hooks sets
Hooks Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4 Set 5
included in the sets
(Code) L mm Ø mm A mm 855 001-51 855 002-51 855 003-51 855 004-51 855 005-51
R1 (853 207-51) 30 3 5 15 10 10
R1 (853 208-51) 50 4 5 5 10 10
R1 (853 211-51) 100 6 10
R2 (853 218-51) 33 3 17 5 5 5 5 5
R2 (853 219-51) 43 4 25 5 5
R2 (853 220-51) 43 4 40 5
R10 (853 227-51) 28 9 5
R10 (853 228-51) 33 17 5
R19 (853 231-51) 13 5 5
R19 (853 232-51) 19 5 5 5 5 5
R19 (853 233-51) 22 5 5
R21 (831 646-51) 220 12 1 1
R24 (831 719-51) 80 26 1 5 7 3
R24 (852 167-51) 100 42 1 2 3
R29 (853 235-51) 60 5 5
R30 (853 237-51) 35 4 5 5 35 40 10
R33 (832 162-51) 30 90 1 1 2 1
R35 (853 239-51) 17 35 5 5 5
R35 (853 240-51) 17 55 5
R37 (831 441-51) 60 1 3 3
R42 (838 365-51) 35 238 1 1 1 1
R43 (838 373-51) 42 238 1
Pieces 20 45 69 100 107

L = hook length mm
A = free gap mm

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 181

 Bins and cabinets

Storage bins and drawer storage units are the essence of small-parts storage and parts picking. The wide selection
of Treston products includes solutions for the sorting, storage, and use of items and parts of various shapes and sizes. Also
suitable for EPAs. Durable and functional storage – now and in the future.

182 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Small-parts storage cabinets

These cabinets can be wall hung or mounted on bench
top turntables, or stood on the work top. Two frames of
different heights are available, 290 and 550 mm. A stor-
age cabinet consists of a frame, shelves, small drawers and
labels. The back of the cabinets feature ready-made holes
for wall mounting. Cross and length dividers are available
as an accessory.

+
Small drawers on page 198.

Series 290 (Size W x D x H mm: 310 x 180 x 290)

Code 290-3 291-3 292-3 294-3 296-3 297-3 290C-3
Includes drawers L-00 L-01 L-02 L-04 L-06 L-07 L-01 (12 pcs)
of type (30 pcs) (24 pcs) (12 pcs) (12 pcs) (4 pcs) (6 pcs) L-04 (3 pcs)
(quantity/drawer) L-06 (1 pcs)

Cross dividers, V-00 V-01 V-02 V-04 V-06 V-07 V-01 (5 pcs)
ordered separately (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) V-04 (5 pcs)
(quantity/drawer) V-06 (5 pcs)

Length dividers, - V-012 V-012 V-0456 V-0456 V-078 V-012 (1 pcs)

ordered separately (1 pcs) (3 pcs) (1 pcs) (5 pcs) (3 pcs) V-0456 (1 pcs)
(quantity/drawer) V-0456 (5 pcs)

Grey frame (RAL7016), crystal clear drawers and self-adhesive labels. Strong polypropylene (PP) frame, shelves made of galvanised steel and drawers made of clear
polystyrene (PS).

Series 290 ESD (Size W x D x H mm: 310 x 180 x 290)

Code ESD 291-4ESD 294-4ESD
Includes drawers L-61-4ESD L-64-4ESD
of type (24 pcs) (12 pcs)
(quantity/drawer)
Cross dividers, V-1-4ESD V-4-4ESD
ordered separately (5 pcs) (5 pcs)
(quantity/drawer)

The frame is made of semiconductive polypropylene (PP), the drawers of semiconductive

polystyrene (PS), and the shelves of galvanised steel.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 183

 STORAGE SYSTEMS FiFo
Bins shelving
and cabinets
and storage solution

Series 550 (Size W x D x H mm: 310 x 180 x 550)

Code 550-3 551-3 552-3 554-3 556-3 557-3 550C-3
Includes drawers L-00 L-01 L-02 L-04 L-06 L-07 L-01 (24 pcs)
of type (60 pcs) (48 pcs) (24 pcs) (24 pcs) (8 pcs) (12 pcs) L-04 (6 pcs)
(quantity/drawer) L-06 (2 pcs)

Cross dividers, ordered V-00 V-01 V-02 V-04 V-06 V-07 V-01 (5 pcs)
separately (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) (5 pcs) V-04 (5 pcs)
(quantity/drawer) V-06 (5 pcs)

Length dividers, ordered - V-012 V-012 V-0456 V-0456 V-078 V-012 (1 pcs)
separately (1 pcs) (3 pcs) (1 pcs) (5 pcs) (3 pcs) V-0456 (1 pcs)
(quantity/drawer) V-0456 (5 pcs)
Grey frame (RAL7016), crystal clear drawers and self-adhesive labels. Strong polypropylene (PP) frame, shelves made of galvanised steel and drawers made of clear
polystyrene (PS).

Series 550 ESD (Size W x D x H mm: 310 x 180 x 550)

Code 551-4ESD 554-4ESD
Includes drawers L-61-4ESD L-64-4ESD
of type (48 pcs) (24 pcs)
(quantity/drawer)

Cross dividers, ordered V-1-4ESD V-4-4ESD

separately (5 pcs) (5 pcs)
(quantity/drawer)

The frame is made of semiconductive polypropylene (PP), the drawers of semiconductive

polystyrene (PS), and the shelves of galvanised steel.

+
Cabinet trolley on page 125.
This assembly holds 8 cabinets, which must be ordered separately.

184 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Spacemisers for
small-parts storage cabinets
Perfect for storage and identification of thousands of small compo-
nents in retail, manufacturing, workshops and warehousing. A stor-
age spacemiser holds 12 small-parts storage cabinets from series 550,
which must be ordered separately (cabinets on page 184). Owing to its
robust base and divider shelf system, the spacemiser retains its cabinets
firmly in place and has a load capacity of 400 kg.

Mounted on a ball-bearing base, the unit can be effortlessly rotated for

ease of use. This assembly offers storage for up to 4320 different items on
a floor area of only 0.25 sqm. The unit is easy to assemble.

Spacemiser
Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code Code ESD
500 x 500 x 1730* 400 12-550 12-550 ESD
*The overall dimensions of a completely assembled unit.

Bench top spacemiser PTP-5

The product holds 2 small-parts storage cabinets from series 550 or 290
which must be ordered separately (cabinets on pages 183-184). The unit
includes a ball bearing base. .

Bench top spacemiser

Size W x D x H mm* Max load kg Code Code ESD
360 x 310 x 300 mm (series 290)* 50 PTP-5 PTP-5 ESD
360 x 310 x 560 mm (series 550) *
*The overall dimensions of a completely assembled unit.

Spacemiser

ESD bench top spacemiser

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 185

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Storage bin cabinets

These cabinets can be wall hung or mounted on turntables, or

stood on a work top. This product is available in two depths, 300
and 400 mm.

This product includes a frame, bins and labels with protective shields.
Backstops hold the bins when fully extended. The sturdy steel frame
has been given a durable powder-coat finish in grey (RAL 7035),
and the back of the cabinet includes holes for wall mounting. The
bins are of clear polystyrene (PS), coloured polypropylene (PP) or
recycled polypropylene (PP). The bins are detailed on page 189.

Storage bin cabinets

Colour Code Code Code Code
Crystal clear 0830-1 1630-1 0840-1 1640-1
Grey 0830-3 1630-3 0840-3 1640-3
Red 0830-5 1630-5 0840-5 1640-5
Blue 0830-6 1630-6 0840-6 1640-6
ESD 0830 ESD 1630 ESD 0840 ESD 1640 ESD
Includes drawers 3020 3010 4020 4010
(type/quantity) (8 pcs) (16 pcs) (8 pcs) (16 pcs)
Frame width (mm) 400 400 400 400
depth mm 300 300 400 400
height (mm) 395 395 395 395
Cross dividers, ordered separately D-20/ D-20-4ESD D-10 / D-10-4ESD D-20 / D-20-4ESD D-10 / D-10-4ESD
(quantity/drawer) (max. 4 pcs) (max. 4 pcs) (max. 6 pcs) (max. 6 pcs)

Treston ReBOX storage bin cabinets

Code Code Code Code
Recycled plastic 6083-30R 6163-30R 6084-30R 6164-30R
Includes drawers 6320-30R 6310-30R 6420-30R 6410-30R
(type/quantity) (8 pcs) (16 pcs) (8 pcs) (16 pcs)
Frame width (mm) 400 400 400 400
depth mm 300 300 400 400
height (mm) 395 395 395 395
Cross dividers, ordered separately 620 610 620 610
(quantity/drawer) (max. 4 pcs) (max. 4 pcs) (max. 6 pcs) (max. 6 pcs)

The Treston ReBOX bins are detailed on page 193.

186 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Spacemisers for storage bin cabinets

1
1 x spacemiser 16-300
8 x storage bin cabinets 0830
8 x storage bin cabinets 1630

2
1 x spacemiser 16-400
8 x storage bin cabinets 1640
8 x storage bin cabinets 0840
1 2

A free-standing spacemiser storage system for stores, production facilities,

workshops and warehouses. This assembly holds 16 storage bin cabinets,
which must be ordered separately (cabinets on page 184). The sturdy,
ball-bearing base has a load capacity of 800 kg. These assemblies offer
storage for up to 1792 different items on a floor area of only 0.64 sqm. Easy
to assemble — no tools required.The unit includes a ball-bearing base and
shelves in four layers. The assembly is made of grey powder-coated steel
(RAL 7035).

Spacemiser
Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Storage bin depth mm Code Code ESD
700 x 700 x1680* 800 300 16-300 16-300 ESD
800 x 800 x1680* 800 400 16-400 16-400 ESD
*The overall dimensions of a completely assembled unit.

Retaining bars
Storage bin cabinets are also suitable for use in maintenance vehicles. Re-
taining bars, to be ordered separately as an accessory, keep the bins in
place in a moving vehicle. Retaining bars are suitable for all models.

Retaining bars
Name Code
Retaining bar set, 4 pcs A 400

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 187

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

High density storage cabinets

High density storage cabinets are suitable for the organisa-
tion and sorting of large item quantities at production facil-
ities, warehouses, stores and workshops. One cabinet can
offer storage for 336 separate items on a floor area of only
0.25 m². If necessary, the cabinets can be equipped with
castors or retaining bars.

This product includes a frame, bins and labels with protec-

tive shields. Backstops hold the bins when fully extended.
Adjustable feet are provided for fine levelling of the cabinet
on uneven surfaces. The load capacity of a cabinet is 240
kg, and that of a single shelf is 30 kg. The frame is made of
grey powder-coated steel (RAL 7035). Profiled ends and a
welded steel construction contribute to the general robust-
ness of the frame. Details on the shelf bins can be found on
page 189.

High density storage cabinets

Colour Code Code
Grey 2440-3 4840-3
Red 2440-5 4840-5
Blue 2440-6 4840-6
ESD 2440 ESD 4840 ESD
Includes drawers 4020 4010
(type/quantity) (24 pcs) (48 pcs)
Frame depth 410 410
width 605 605
height 870 870
Cross dividers, ordered D-20 / D-20-4ESD D-10 / D-10-4ESD
separately (quantity/drawer) (6 pcs) (6 pcs)

Castor set
Name Size mm Max Code Code ESD
load kg
Castor set, 4 pcs Ø 100 150 PS-LH PS-LH ESD

Retaining bars
Name Code
High density storage
Retaining bar set, 8 pcs A-605 cabinet 2440-6 with castor
Note! High density storage bin cabinets have no ready-made mounting holes set and retaining bars.
on the back.

188 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Shelf bins

Shelf bins are also ideal with shelving

! cabinets, see page 162.

A series of durable, quality bins. The bin types to choose from are classic plastic (Treston Classic), sustainable wood-based
bioplastic (Treston BiOX) and 100% recycled plastic (Treston ReBOX). Shelf bins are designed to fit all standard metric shelves,
cabinets, paternosters and industrial workstations.

Treston Classic shelf bins

The shelf bin product family includes 11 different bin sizes to choose from. Bins of the same width stack securely, even if they
are of different lengths. The depth dimensions are 300, 400, 500 and 600 mm, three different widths. Straight sides ensure an
efficient use of space, and the bins are available in several bright colours to facilitate product identification. You can see the
contents clearly through the transparent bins. Each bin comes with a label and protective cover.

A label with a protective shield is easy to Corrugated base stops items from sliding Shelf bins are designed to fit all metric
clean and change when necessary. The on the surface and makes picking up shelving systems.
shield and label is included. small items easy.

Individual bins can be sub-divided inter- Space is reserved for labels on the rear
nally using dividers. Dividers are ordered surface of drawers and on dividers. Labels
separately. are ordered separately.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 189

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Crystal clear Grey, Red, Blue, Black, ESD

RAL 7016 RAL 3020 RAL 5015

Treston Classic shelf bins Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Colour Code Cross Max. Label
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/ + cover
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm bin
PS 92 x 300 x 82 75 x 257 x 70 1.3 30 Crystal clear 3010-1 D-10 4 pcs. S-10M
PP Grey 3010-3
PP Red 3010-5
PP Blue 3010-6
PP ESD 3010-4ESD D-10-4ESD
PS 92 x 400 x 82 75 x 357 x 70 1.9 30 Crystal clear 4010-1 D-10 6 pcs. S-10M
PP Grey 4010-3
PP Red 4010-5
PP Blue 4010-6
PP ESD 4010-4ESD D-10-4ESD
PS 92 x 500 x 82 75 x 457 x 70 2.4 30 Crystal clear 5010-1 D-10 8 pcs. S-10M
PP Grey 5010-3
PP Red 5010-5
PP Blue 5010-6
PP ESD 5010-4ESD D-10-4ESD
PS 132 x 300 x 100 110 x 257 x 90 2.5 30 Crystal clear 3015-1 D-15 4 pcs. S-15M
PP Grey 3015-3
PP Red 3015-5
PP Blue 3015-6
PP ESD -
PS 132 x 400 x 100 110 x 357 x 90 3.2 20 Crystal clear 4015-1 D-15 6 pcs. S-15M
PP Grey 4015-3
PP Red 4015-5
PP Blue 4015-6
PP ESD 4015-4ESD D-15-4ESD
PP 132 x 500 x 100 110 x 457 x 90 4.5 20 Grey 5015-3 D-15 8 pcs. S-15M
PP Red 5015-5
PP Blue 5015-6
PP ESD 5015-4ESD D-15-4ESD

PP 132 x 600 x 100 110 x 557 x 90 5.5 15 Grey 6015-3 D-15 10 pcs. S-15M
PP Red 6015-5
PP Blue 6015-6
PP ESD 6015-4ESD D-15-4ESD

PS 186 x 300 x 82 167 x 257 x 70 3.0 15 Crystal clear 3020-1 D-20 4 pcs. S-20M
PP Grey 3020-3
PP Red 3020-5
PP Blue 3020-6
PP ESD 3020-4ESD D-20-4ESD
PS 186 x 400 x 82 167 x 357 x 70 4.2 15 Crystal clear 4020-1 D-20 6 pcs. S-20M
PP Grey 4020-3
PP Red 4020-5
PP Blue 4020-6
PP ESD 4020-4ESD D-20-4ESD
PS 186 x 500 x 82 167 x 457 x 70 5.3 15 Crystal clear 5020-1 D-20 8 pcs. S-20M
PP Grey 5020-3
PP Red 5020-5
PP Blue 5020-6
PP ESD 5020-4ESD D-20-4ESD
PS 186 x 600 x 82 167 x 557 x 70 6.5 15 Crystal clear 6020-1 D-20 10 pcs. S-20M
PP Grey 6020-3
PP Red 6020-5
PP Blue 6020-6
PP ESD 6020-4ESD D-20-4ESD

PS = Crystal clear polystyrene: temperature tolerance -40 ...+55°C.

PP = Coloured polypropylene: temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C, withstands the effects of most oils, acids and solvents.

190 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Treston BiOX shelf bins

Treston BiOX is the first wood-based bioplastic storage solution for industrial use. The carbon-neutral material of Treston
BiOX bins is over 90% wood-based renewable material, residue from pulp production process, and cellulose fibres from sus-
tainably managed forests. The quality as well as the look and feel of the bins, remains the same as with traditional plastic bins.

Looks like plastic, acts like plastic, but it is Corrugated base stops items from sliding A label with a protective shield is easy to
made of wood-based material. on the surface and makes picking up clean and change when necessary. The
small items easy. shield and label is included.

Withstands the effects of oils, most acids Individual bins can be sub-divided inter- Space is reserved for labels on the rear
and solvents. nally using dividers. Dividers are ordered surface of drawers and on dividers. Labels
separately. are ordered separately.

! All Treston bins and storage solutions gradually becoming available in bioplastic alternatives.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 191

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Treston BiOX shelf bins Accessories

External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Code Cross Max. Label + cover
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/bin
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm

92 x 300 x 82 75 x 257 x 70 1,3 30 3010-7 BIOX D-10 BIOX 4 pcs S-10M BIOX

92 x 400 x 82 75 x 357 x 70 1,9 30 4010-7 BIOX D-10 BIOX 6 pcs S-10M BIOX

92 x 500 x 82 75 x 457 x 70 2,4 30 5010-7 BIOX D-10 BIOX 8 pcs S-10M BIOX

186 x 300 x 82 167 x 257 x 70 3,0 15 3020-7 BIOX D-20 BIOX 4 pcs S-20M BIOX

186 x 400 x 82 167 x 357 x 70 4,2 15 4020-7 BIOX D-20 BIOX 6 pcs S-20M BIOX

186 x 500 x 82 167 x 457 x 70 5,3 15 5020-7 BIOX D-20 BIOX 8 pcs S-20M BIOX

Bin material: Coloured bioplastic with fiber reinforcement. Temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C, withstands the effects of oils, most acids and solvents.
Forest green colour. Due to the wood-based bioplastic material the surface of the bin may show fibers which is completely normal.

Divider material: Transparent wood-based plastic (Woodly). Temperature tolerance -20...+50°C, good resistance against oils, moderate or limited resistance against
polar solvents and highly acidic or alkaline media. Due to the wood-based bioplastic material the dividers may be slightly blurred.

192 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Treston ReBOX shelf bins

Made from 100% recycled plastic, an environmentally friendly and economical range of
bins that offer versatile storage. The product family includes 9 different bin sizes to choose
from. The depth alternatives are 300, 400 and 500 mm, 3 different widths. Large, white
labels come as standard.

! Treston ReBOX was formerly named Kennoset.

Treston ReBOX shelf bins Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Code Cross Max. Label
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm bin

PP 94 x 300 x 80 77 x 260 x 75 1,5 40 6310-30R 610 4 pcs 1778

PP 94 x 400 x 80 77 x 360 x 75 2,1 40 6410-30R 610 6 pcs 1778

PP 94 x 500 x 80 77 x 460 x 75 2,7 40 6510-30R 610 8 pcs 1778

PP 186 x 300 x 80 173 x 260 x 75 3,4 20 6320-30R 620 4 pcs 1778

PP 186 x 400 x 80 173 x 360 x 75 4,7 20 6420-30R 620 6 pcs 1778

PP 186 x 500 x 80 173 x 460 x 75 6,0 20 6520-30R 620 8 pcs 1778

PP = Recycled polypropylene: temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C, withstands the effects of most oils, acids and solvents.
Grey, contains small traces of ink residues and the colour tint may vary.

Treston ReBOX shelf bins, stackable Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Code Cross Max. Label
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm bin

PP 160 x 300 x 85 145 x 240 x 81 2,8 20 6316-30R 616 2 pcs 3190

PP 160 x 400 x 85 145 x 340 x 81 4,0 20 6416-30R 616 3 pcs 3190

PP 160 x 500 x 85 145 x 440 x 81 5,2 20 6516-30R 616 4 pcs 3190

PP = Recycled polypropylene: temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C, withstands the effects of most oils, acids and solvents.
Grey, contains small traces of ink residues and the colour tint may vary.

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 193

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Stacking bins

Our stacking bins have been designed for daily use in stores, production facilities and warehouses. The bin types to choose
from are classic plastic (Treston Classic) and 100% recycled plastic (Treston ReBOX).These bins have been designed to fit
all standard metric shelves, paternosters and industrial workstations. Bins of the same width stack securely, even if they are of
different lengths. Straight sides ensure an efficient use of space.

Treston Classic stacking bins

Our product range includes 8 bins of different sizes. The design, with a half-open front, allows excellent visibility and easy
access to the bin’s contents, making it easy to pick from. The colour options allow a storage system to be designed to meet the
customer’s requirements. The crystal clear bins are transparent, allowing easy visual identification. Bright colours make finding
the right item easy.

The design, with a half-open front, A corrugated base stops items from sliding Bin rail 700 for stacking and picking bins.
allows excellent visibility and easy access around on the surface and makes picking Includes screws for wall mounting. The load
to the bin’s contents, making it easy to them up easier. capacity is 50 kg. Length 700 mm. Made
pick from. of grey epoxy enamelled steel profile.
Stacking bins 1015 - 1930 are all suitable.
Ordered separately.

A label with a self-adhesive protective Individual bins can be sub-divided Self-adhesive barcodes can be affixed to
shield is affixed to the front plate of the bin. internally using dividers. Steel dividers the front plate and dividers of a bin.
Such labels are easy to change when nec- are powder-coated in a grey finish (RAL
essary. Labels must be ordered separately. 7035). Dividers are ordered separately.

194 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Crystal clear Grey, Red, Blue, Black, ESD

RAL 7016 RAL 3020 RAL 5015

Treston Classic stacking bins Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Colour Code. Cross Max. Label +
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/ cover
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm bin
PS 105 x 165 x 75 90 x 105 x 65 0.6 60 Crystal clear 1015-1 — — E-10
PP Grey 1015-3
PP Red 1015-5
PP Blue 1015-6
PP ESD 1015-4ESD

PS 149 x 192 x 105 125 x 130 x 90 1.5 45 Crystal clear 1520-1 — — E-15
PP Grey 1520-3
PP Red 1520-5
PP Blue 1520-6
PP ESD 1520-4ESD

PS 149 x 250 x 130 125 x 185 x 115 2.7 30 Crystal clear 1525-1 V-14 1 pc. E-15
PP Grey 1525-3
PP Red 1525-5
PP Blue 1525-6
PP ESD 1525-4ESD

PS 186 x 300 x 156 155 x 230 x 140 5.0 24 Crystal clear 1930-1 V-19 1 pcs E-20
PP Grey 1930-3
PP Red 1930-5
PP Blue 1930-6
ESD 1930-4ESD

PS 186 x 400 x 156 155 x 330 x 140 7.2 24 Crystal clear 1940-1 V-19 3 pcs E-20
PP Grey 1940-3
PP Red 1940-5
PP Blue 1940-6
PP ESD 1940-4ESD

PS 186 x 500 x 182 145 x 400 x 165 9.6 12 Crystal clear 1950-1 V-195 3 pcs. E-20
PP Grey 1950-3
PP Red 1950-5
PP Blue 1950-6
ESD 1950-4ESD*

PP 310 x 400 x 156 270 x 315 x 140 11.9 12 Grey 3040-3 V-30 3 pcs. E-20
PP Red 3040-5
PP Blue 3040-6
PP ESD 3040-4ESD*

PP 310 x 500 x 182 270 x 400 x 165 17.8 8 Grey 3050-3 V-30 3 pcs. E-20
PP Red 3050-5
PP Blue 3050-6
PP ESD 3050-4ESD*

PS = Crystal clear polystyrene: temperature tolerance -40 ...+55°C. *) Made to order. Request a quotation.

PP = Coloured polypropylene: temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C,

withstands the effects of most oils, acids and solvents.

+
Stacking bin trolley on page 124.
Up to 112 stacking bins can be attached to one trolley, must be ordered separately

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 195

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Treston ReBOX stacking bins

Made from 100% recycled plastic, an environmentally friendly and economical
range of bins that offer versatile storage. The product family includes 7 different bin
sizes to choose from. An open front makes picking easier, length dividers available
for some bin models.

! Treston ReBOX was formerly named Kennoset.

Treston ReBOX stacking bins Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Code Divider Label
dimensions dimensions litres package
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm

PP 103 x160 x 73* 87 x 120 x 65 0,7 20 6547-30R - 1790

PP 146 x 250 x12* 123 x 180 x120 2,7 20 6546-30R - 1790

PP 205 x 340 x 153* 180 x 285 x140 7,2 12 6545-30R - 1790

PP 310 x 500 x 180 270 x 410 x 170 18,8 8 6544-30R - 1790

* Bin can be hung on wall-mounted bin rails.

PP = Recycled polypropylene: temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C, withstands the effects of most oils, acids and solvents.
Grey, contains small traces of ink residues and the colour tint may vary.

Treston ReBOX stacking bins, longitudinally dividable Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Code Length Max. Label
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm bin

PP 230 x 300 x 120 205 x 225 x 110 5,1 12 6323-30R 630-30R 1 pc 3189

PP 230 x 400 x 150 205 x 325 x 140 9,3 12 6423-30R 640-30R 1 pc 3189

PP 230 x 500 x 150 205 x 425 x 140 12,2 12 6523-30R 650-30R 1 pc 3189

PP = Recycled polypropylene: temperature tolerance -20 ... +75°C, withstands the effects of most oils, acids and solvents.
Grey, contains small traces of ink residues and the colour tint may vary.

196 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Storage and picking bins

Treston ReBOX storage bins

Particularly suitable for in-house material flows within factories and
warehouses. Material: recycled polypropylene (PP) or semicon-
ductive polypropylene (PP). Standard colour: grey.

External dimensions Capacity, Quantity/ Code Code ESD

W x D x H mm litres package
185 x 490 x 250 12.1 12 1949-30R 1949-4ESD*
310 x 490 x 250 22.6 12 3149-30R 3149-4ESD*
* Made to order. Request a quotation.

Picking bins
All of the inner faces are rounded and the front has a distinctive
sloping design which facilitates picking. Bins can be hung on the
wall on bin rails, or mounted on workbench bin rails. Material: pol-
ystyrene (PS). Standard colour: blue RAL 5015.

External dimensions Capacity, Quantity/ Code Code ESD

W x D x H mm litres package blue
99 x 160 x 70 1.1 60 30-1L-6 30-1L-4ESD
198 x 160 x 70 2.2 30 30-2L-6 30-2L-4ESD
198 x 160 x 70* 2.2 30 30-23L-6 30-23L-4ESD
* includes 2 fixed dividers

Bin rail
A wall mounting rail for stacking and picking bins. With fixing
screws. Made of grey powder coated steel profile.

Length mm Max load kg Code

700 50 700

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 197

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Small drawers
Crystal clear drawers come as standard with self-adhesive labels. Cross and length dividers are available as an accessory.
The drawers and their dividers are made of crystal clear polystyrene (PS).

Small drawers Accessories

Material External Internal Capacity, Quantity/ Code Cross Max. Length Max.
dimensions dimensions litres package divider amount/bin divider amount/
W x D x H mm W x D x H mm bin
PS 55 x 175 x 37 47 x 146 x 32 0.2 120 L-00 V-00 5 pcs - -
PS 69 x 175 x 37 61 x 146 x 32 0.3 96 L-01 V-01 5 pcs V-012 1 pcs
PS 138 x 175 x 37 128 x 146 x 32 0.6 48 L-02 V-02 5 pcs V-012 3 pcs
PS 92 x 175 x 59 82 x 146 x 55 0.7 45 L-04 V-04 5 pcs V-0456 1 pcs
PS 277 x 175 x 59 266 x 146 x 55 2.1 15 L06 V-06 5 pcs V-0456 5 pcs
PS 138 x 175 x 81 128 x 146 x 74 1.4 24 L-07 V-07 5 pcs V-078 3 pcs

PS = crystal clear polystyrene

Small drawers ESD Accessories

Material External dimensions Capacity, Quantity Code Cross Max. amount/bin
W x D x H mm litres /package ESD divider

PS 69 x 170 x 40 0.2 96 L-61-4ESD V-1-4ESD 5 pcs

PS 92 x 170 x 62 0.7 45 L-64-4ESD V-4-4ESD 5 pcs

PS = semiconductive polystyrene

198 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 STORAGE SYSTEMS Bins and cabinets

Stacking bin racks

On BR racks, stacking bins are inclined at a 20-degree angle, en-
abling the excellent presentation of products. They offer an efficient
storage system for daily use when small components are required
frequently. This product includes a grey steel frame in an epoxy
powder-coated finish and seven fixed, forward-sloping storage
levels, 930 mm in width. Stacking bins must be ordered separately.

Bin rack
Size W x D x H mm Max load kg Code
990 x 500 x 1540 350* BR-2530
990 x 600 x 1670 350* BR-4050
*Load capacity 50 kg per level.
1 x stacking bin rack BR-2530
35 x red stacking bin 1930-5

Suitable stacking bins

Bin code Quantity/ Max. quantity/
rail pair rack
Bin rack BR-2530 1525 6 pcs 42 pcs
1930 5 pcs 35 pcs
Bin rack BR-4050 1940 5 pcs 30 pcs
1950 5 pcs 30 pcs
3040 3 pcs 18 pcs
3050 3 pcs 18 pcs
Details of stacking bins can be found on page 189.

1 x stacking bin rack BR-4050

30 x grey stacking bin 1940-3

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 199

 SPARE PARTS

Spare parts
Arm adapters for MH/MA/MA2/MA3
Profile type Workbench model MH MA MA2 MA3
C-profiles TPH, TPB AS2 AS2 AS2 AS3
Upright profiles Concept, TP, TED, Workshop AS2 AS2 AS2 AS3

Arm adapters for Concept/TP/TED/Workshop accessories with arms (for example 93049002P)
Profile type Workbench / trolley model 40 mm arm 60 mm arm
C-profiles TPH, TPB - E824 081-49
AL2X aluminum profiles WB 890 524-49 890 525-49
Aluminum profiles WTR E821 573-49 E821 572-49

Castors
Name Compatibility Screw Code
Castor set Ø 100 55 drawer unit 852 625-00
Castor set Ø 100 45 drawer units, Storage trolley M10 852 768-00
Castor set Ø 100 Fitter’s trolley, Concept and TP benches M12 834 734-00
Castor set Ø 100 ESD 45 drawer units, Storage trolley M10 852 774-00
Castor set Ø 100 ESD Concept and TP benches M12 860 429-00
Castor set Ø 100 WB bench, TED desk LCS100
Castor set Ø 100 ESD WB bench, TED desk LCS100 ESD
Castor set Ø 125 TRTA trolley LCS125
Castor set Ø 125 ESD TRTA trolley LCS125 ESD
Fixed castor Ø 150 Service trolley 900 537-00
Swivel castor Ø 100 Service trolley 942 060-00
Swivel castor Ø125, brake Treston Industrial Multi trolley M10 10019-00
Swivel castor Ø125 Treston Industrial Multi trolley M10 10021-00
Swivel castor Ø125 ESD, brake Treston Industrial Multi trolley ESD M10 10022-00
Swivel castor Ø125 ESD Treston Industrial Multi trolley ESD M10 10020-00
Support castor Ø 100 Tool storage system 943 690-00
Swivel castor Ø100 Workshop bench leg, Treston Tower, Heavy duty trolley 1987
Fixed castor Ø100 Workshop bench leg, Treston Tower, Heavy duty trolley 1988
Castor set Ø 50 Transport skate M10 853 176-00
Castor set Ø 50 ESD Transport skate ESD M10 853 175-00

Drawer unit spare parts

Name Size W x D x H Compatibility Code
Cover with an ESD mat, assembled 450 x 518 x14 45 drawer unit W87 2107-49
Cover with a rubber mat, assembled 450 x 518 x14 45 drawer unit W87 2107-41
Cover without mat 450 x 518 x14 45 drawer unit 872 107-49
ESD mat, light grey 445 x 513 45 drawer unit cover 836 750-00
Rubber mat, black 445 x 513 45 drawer unit cover 836 740-00
Shelf for cabinet version 45 drawer unit 872 043-49
Bracket pair for the shelf 45 drawer units 872 045-51
Castor set Ø 100 ESD 45 drawer units 852 774-00
Base 55 drawer unit 854 101-49
Top cover 55 drawer unit 854 102-49
Rubber mat 549 x 709 55 drawer unit’s cover 836 717-00
Cover with rubber mat 70 drawer unit 834 904-41
Rubber mat 676 x 445 71/79 drawer unit’s cover / Service trolley cover 854 036-00
Cover with rubber mat 906 x 736 90 drawer unit 854 258-41
Cover with rubber mat 1304 x 736 130 drawer unit 854 259-41

200 TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN

 SPARE PARTS

Drawer interior parts for drawer unit 45

Name Compatibility Code
Vertical divider 45/100 drawer 872 300-49
Vertical divider 45/150 and 45/200 drawers 872 301-49
Divider plate L=125 45/100 drawer 872 302-49
Divider plate L=185 45/100 drawer 872 303-49
Divider plate L=250 45/100 drawer 872 304-49
Divider plate L=375 45/100 drawer 872 305-49
Divider plate L=125 45/150 and 45/200 drawers 872 306-49
Divider plate L=185 45/150 and 45/200 drawers 872 307-49
Divider plate L=250 45/150 and 45/200 drawers 872 308-49
Divider plate L=375 45/150 and 45/200 drawers 872 309-49
Divider holder set for drawer interiors (incl. 12 pcs) 853 003-00

Drawer interior parts for drawer units 55, 70, 90 and 130
Name Compatibility Code
Divider, L=600 For drawer height 75 872 310-49
Divider, L=600 For drawer height 100 872 311-49
Divider, L=600 For drawer height 150&250 872 312-49
Middle plate, L=100 For drawer height 75 832 525-49
Middle plate, L=150 For drawer height 75 832 526-49
Middle plate, L=300 For drawer height 75 832 527-49
Middle plate, L=100 For drawer height 100 832 528-49
Middle plate, L=150 For drawer height 100 832 529-49
Middle plate, L=300 For drawer height 100 832 530-49
Middle plate, L=100 For drawer height 150 & 250 832 533-49
Middle plate, L=150 For drawer height 150 & 250 832 531-49
Middle plate, L=300 For drawer height 150 & 250 832 532-49
Middle plate holder set, 12 pcs 853 003-00
Divider side holder 75 For drawer height 75 854 282-49
Divider side holder 100 For drawer height 100 854 264-49
Divider side holder 150 For drawer height 150 & 250 854 265-49
Tool trough 150/4 150x150mm, 4x33 troughs 837 460-00
Tool trough 150/3 150x150mm, 3x45 troughs 837 450-00
Tool trough 150/2 150x150mm, 2x70 troughs 837 430-00
Middle plate, tool troughs, 33 mm For tool trough 150/4 837 490-00
Middle plate, tool troughs, 45 mm For tool trough 150/3 837 480-00
Middle plate, tool troughs, 70 mm For tool trough 150/2 837 470-00
Pick-up box 149 x 85 x 48 mm 851 843-00

Spare parts for industrial cabinets

Name Compatibility Code
Rubber mat 550 x 420 Industrial cabinet 55/100 836 716-00
Rubber mat 799 x 420 Industrial cabinet 80/100 836 715-00

TRESTON - ERGONOMICS | ESD | LEAN 201

 Download free eBooks

Increasing productivity with proper ergonomics

This informational e-book will help you learn how ergonomic environments can have a direct influence
on employee well-being, the reduction of time and waste, and ultimately, greater productivity.

6-point checklist for creating and maintaining ESD-protected areas

This informational e-book lists 6 steps for setting up an ESD-protected area in your workplace. No
matter whether you need just one workbench or a full-scale production line, the same principles apply to
ensuring that ESD protection functions as it should.

LEAN thinking perfects production processes

This e-book will help you understand LEAN philosophy and how Treston, as a manufacturer of technical
facilities and ergonomic furniture, can help you with the LEAN thinking to perfect your production
processes.

These and more educative and useful e-books available on our website:
treston.com/catalogues-and-brochures

Product animations, informational videos and more!

vimeo.com/trestongroup
202
 What our customers say

"Several competitor products we "Treston was a great partner

viewed didn’t give us the same in designing a custom packing
level of confidence, modularity bench and worktable solution for
and robustness” Christie’s."

– David Walch, Operations Director, – Emily Sarokin,

FT Technologies Christie's Auction House NYC

"The two most important goals were "Thank you for the informative
ergonomics and efficiency. This we day at Treston. Your great
have reached by using Treston.” team impressed me with their
knowledge."
– Lisanne Broer-van Abeelen,
bol.com fulfilment center – M. Huber, Kaiserslautern,
SKS Welding Systems GmbH

Read all our customer

stories at:
"SNCF chose Treston for high
quality, ergonomics and modularity treston.com/about-us/
enabling future modifications .” customer-stories
– David Lacour, Head of Proximity
Tachometry, SNCF Mobility
HEADQUARTERS FACTORIES
Treston Oy Treston Oy, Turku plant Treston Oy, Jyväskylä plant
Sorakatu 1 Sorakatu 1 PO Box 33 (Sohlberginkatu 10)
FI-20730 Turku FI-20730 Turku FI-40351 Jyväskylä
Tel. +358 10 4469 11 Tel. +358 10 4469 11 Tel. +358 10 4469 11
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected]
www.treston.com www.treston.fi www.treston.fi

Copyright © 2022 Treston Oy. All rights reserved. Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
FRANCE GERMANY
Treston France SARL Treston Deutschland GmbH Treston Deutschland GmbH
Z.A.C. de la Bonne Rencontre Friedrich-Ebert-Damm 143 Niederlassung Raunheim
1, voie Gallo Romaine,Quincy-Voisins 22047 Hamburg Frankfurter Straße 101
77334 Meaux Cedex Tel. +49 40 8816 5022 - 0 65479 Raunheim
Tel. +33 1 64 17 11 11 [email protected] Tel. +49 6142 992 50
[email protected] www.treston.de [email protected]
www.treston.fr www.treston.de

SWEDEN UNITED KINGDOM USA

Treston AB Treston Ltd Treston, Inc.
Enhagsslingan 6 Treston House 156 Bluffs Court
187 40 Täby 5b Bone Lane, Newbury Canton, GA 30114
Tel. +46 8 511 791 60 Berkshire, RG14 5SH Tel. +1 770-721-7980
[email protected] Tel. +44 1635 521521 [email protected]
www.treston.se [email protected] www.treston.us
www.treston.com

Main catalogue_EN_12-2022.
Premium partners

BENELUX NORWAY
Human Workspace BV Industrimøbler AS
Mechelaarstraat 17 Bjørnerudveien 12A
4903 RE Oosterhout 1266 Oslo
Tel. +31 162 454 383 Tel. +47 22 25 05 00
[email protected] [email protected]
www.humanworkspace.nl www.industrimobler.no

"Treston was a great partner in

Workspaces for happier workfaces. designing a custom packing bench and
worktable solution for Christie’s.”

This is our aspiration. This is our promise. This is what – Emily Sarokin,
Treston is all about. Christie's Auction House NYC

With decades of experience, in-depth understanding of

ergonomics in industrial environments, unmatched ESD
competence and proven LEAN knowhow we at Treston are
in a unique position to help our customers in keeping their
business and people in good shape.

"Treston solutions' simple shape and

treston.com colour and the ergonomic features
make working easy and pleasant.”

– Thorsten Timmermann,
Sennheiser